User`s Guide - Vizrt documentation center

User`s Guide - Vizrt documentation center

Viz Trio

User’s Guide

3.0

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt. All rights reserved.

No part of this software, documentation or publication may be reproduced, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, computer language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronically, mechanically, magnetically, optically, chemically, photocopied, manually, or otherwise, without prior written permission from Vizrt.

Vizrt specifically retains title to all Vizrt software. This software is supplied under a license agreement and may only be installed, used or copied in accordance to that agreement.

Disclaimer

Vizrt provides this publication “as is” without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied.

This publication may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document to ensure that it contains accurate and up-todate information, the publisher and author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions. Nor is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this document.

Vizrt’s policy is one of continual development, so the content of this document is periodically subject to be modified without notice. These changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Vizrt may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time.

Vizrt may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matters in this document.

The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents.

Technical Support

For technical support and the latest news of upgrades, documentation, and related products, visit the Vizrt web site at www.vizrt.com

.

Last Updated

18.09.2015

Table of Contents

1 Introduction

.................................................................................................11

1.1 About the Document

...........................................................................11

1.1.1 Document Structure

..................................................................11

1.1.2 Related Documents and information sources

..................................12

1.1.3 Conventions

............................................................................ 12

1.2 Words and Expressions

........................................................................12

1.3 Customer Feedback and Suggestions

..................................................... 13

1.4 Customer Support Requests

................................................................. 14

1.4.1 Before Submitting a Support Request

........................................... 14

1.4.2 Submitting a Support Request

.................................................... 14

2 Viz Trio Overview

......................................................................................... 17

2.1 System Overview

............................................................................... 17

2.2 New Features in this version

.................................................................18

3 Requirements and Installation

.........................................................................19

3.1 Prerequisites

......................................................................................19

3.2 General Requirements

......................................................................... 19

3.3 Hardware Requirements

.......................................................................20

3.4 Viz Trio Software Requirements

............................................................. 20

3.5 Installing Viz Trio

................................................................................ 21

3.6 Components and Applications used with Viz Trio

....................................... 21

3.6.1 Viz Engine

...............................................................................21

3.6.2 Media Sequencer

......................................................................22

3.6.3 Viz Pilot

.................................................................................. 22

3.6.4 Viz Trio Keyboard

......................................................................22

3.7 Upgrading Viz Trio

.............................................................................. 23

3.8 Video Codecs

.....................................................................................23

3.9 Shared Data

...................................................................................... 23

3.10 Ports and Connections

....................................................................... 23

3.10.1 Viz Trio Port numbers

.............................................................. 23

3.10.2 Multiplexing Port

.....................................................................23

4 Getting Started

............................................................................................ 25

4.1 Hardware Configuration Versions

........................................................... 25

4.1.1 Conventional Configuration

........................................................ 25

4.1.2 Single Machine Configuration (Viz Trio OneBox)

.............................. 25

4.2 Basic Configuration and Startup

............................................................ 25

4.2.1 Connecting to Media Sequencer

.................................................. 26

4.2.2 Connecting to Viz Engine

........................................................... 26

4.2.3 Starting Viz Trio

....................................................................... 26

4.3 Configuring the Graphics Database

........................................................ 27

4.4 Configuring the Media Sequencer

.......................................................... 29

5 User Interface

..............................................................................................31

5.1 Main menu

........................................................................................32

5.2 Undo and Redo

.................................................................................. 35

5.3 Playout and Design Mode

.................................................................... 35

5.4 Viz Artist Mode

.................................................................................. 35

5.5 On Air Mode

...................................................................................... 36

5.6 Slave Mode

....................................................................................... 36

5.7 Show Modes

...................................................................................... 36

5.7.1 Context-enabled Shows

............................................................. 37

5.7.2 User-defined Contexts

............................................................... 38

5.8 Show Control

..................................................................................... 38

5.8.1 Show Directories

...................................................................... 39

5.8.2 Add Page List View

................................................................... 45

5.8.3 Create Playlist

......................................................................... 45

5.8.4 Show Properties

....................................................................... 46

5.8.5 Cleanup Channels

.....................................................................49

5.8.6 Initialize Channels

.................................................................... 50

5.8.7 Show Concept

..........................................................................51

5.8.8 Callup Page

............................................................................. 51

5.9 Template List

..................................................................................... 52

5.10 Page List

......................................................................................... 54

5.11 Playlist Modes

.................................................................................. 62

5.11.1 Playlist

..................................................................................64

5.12 Tab Fields Window

............................................................................ 69

5.13 Status Bar

....................................................................................... 70

5.14 Page Editor

......................................................................................72

5.14.1 Controls

................................................................................ 73

5.14.2 Text

......................................................................................77

5.14.3 Database Linking

.................................................................... 81

5.14.4 Images

................................................................................. 83

5.14.5 Transformation Properties

......................................................... 84

5.14.6 Tables

................................................................................... 85

5.14.7 Clock

.................................................................................... 87

5.14.8 Maps

.................................................................................... 88

5.15 Create New Scroll

............................................................................. 90

5.15.1 Create New Scroll Editor

.......................................................... 90

5.15.2 Scroll Elements Editor

..............................................................91

5.15.3 Scroll Configuration

................................................................. 92

5.15.4 Scroll Live Controls

................................................................. 92

5.15.5 Scroll Control

......................................................................... 93

5.15.6 Element Spacing

.....................................................................93

5.15.7 Easepoint Editor

..................................................................... 93

5.15.8 Working with Scrolls

................................................................ 94

5.16 Edit Show Script

............................................................................... 96

5.17 Snapshot

.........................................................................................96

5.18 Render Videoclip

...............................................................................97

5.19 Search Media

................................................................................... 98

5.20 Import Scenes

................................................................................ 100

5.21 Graphics Preview

............................................................................ 101

5.21.1 Graphics Control Buttons

........................................................ 101

5.21.2 Connection Status

................................................................. 102

5.22 Video Preview

................................................................................ 103

5.22.1 Video Control Buttons

............................................................ 103

5.23 TimeCode Monitor

........................................................................... 104

5.24 Field Linking and Feed Browsing in Viz Trio

...........................................106

5.24.1 Workflow

............................................................................. 106

5.24.2 Overview

............................................................................. 107

5.24.3 Technical

............................................................................. 108

5.24.4 Field Linking

.........................................................................108

5.24.5 Feed Browsing

......................................................................112

5.25 Timeline Editor

............................................................................... 114

5.25.1 Timeline Editor Functions

........................................................114

5.25.2 Working with the Timeline Editor

..............................................116

5.25.3 Troubleshooting and Known Limitations

..................................... 118

5.26 Viz Trio Keyboard

............................................................................ 119

6 Configuration Interface

................................................................................ 123

6.1 User Interface

.................................................................................. 123

6.1.1 General

................................................................................ 123

6.1.2 Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros

.................................................125

6.1.3 Text Editor

.............................................................................126

6.1.4 Page List/Playlist

.....................................................................128

6.1.5 Paths

....................................................................................129

6.1.6 Local Preview

.........................................................................130

6.1.7 User Restrictions

.................................................................... 130

6.2 Output

............................................................................................132

6.2.1 Program and Preview Channels

................................................. 134

6.2.2 Profile Setups

.........................................................................134

6.2.3 Forked Execution

.................................................................... 135

6.2.4 Working With the Profile Configuration

........................................ 137

6.2.5 Upgrading Old Profiles

............................................................. 143

6.3 Viz Graphic Hub

............................................................................... 143

6.4 Viz Pilot Database

.............................................................................144

6.4.1 Database Settings

.................................................................. 144

6.4.2 Picture Database Settings

........................................................ 145

6.5 Connectivity

.................................................................................... 146

6.5.1 MOS

..................................................................................... 146

6.5.2 Intelligent Interface

.................................................................148

6.5.3 General Purpose Input (GPI)

......................................................149

6.5.4 Video Disk Communication Protocol (VDCP)

................................. 152

6.5.5 MCU/AVS

............................................................................... 153

6.5.6 Socket Object Settings

.............................................................155

6.5.7 Proxy

....................................................................................156

6.5.8 Viz One Configuration

..............................................................156

6.6 Import/Export Settings

.......................................................................159

7 Scripting

................................................................................................... 161

7.1 Viz Trio Scripting

.............................................................................. 161

7.1.1 Script Directory

...................................................................... 162

7.1.2 Script Editor

.......................................................................... 162

7.1.3 Script Backup

........................................................................ 165

7.2 Viz Template Wizard Scripting

............................................................. 166

8 Macro Language

.........................................................................................169

8.1 Working with Macro Commands

...........................................................170

8.1.1 Apropos and Help Commands

................................................... 170

8.1.2 Show, Context and Tab-field Commands

...................................... 171

8.2 Working with Macro Commands over a Socket Connection

........................ 174

8.2.1 Sending Macro Commands

....................................................... 174

8.2.2 Unicode Support

.....................................................................175

8.2.3 Escape Sequences

.................................................................. 175

8.2.4 Error Messages

...................................................................... 175

8.3 Working with Shortcut Keys

................................................................ 176

9 Macro Commands and Events

....................................................................... 179

9.1 Commands

...................................................................................... 179

9.2 Events

............................................................................................ 213

9.2.1 Template event callbacks

......................................................... 213

9.2.2 Show event callbacks

.............................................................. 214

10 Designer

................................................................................................. 217

10.1 About Viz Trio Designer

.................................................................... 217

10.1.1 Scene

................................................................................. 218

10.1.2 Resources

............................................................................219

10.1.3 Scene Tree

...........................................................................220

10.1.4 Tab Fields

............................................................................ 221

10.1.5 Page Editor

.......................................................................... 221

10.1.6 Properties

............................................................................ 222

10.2 Creating Scene Elements in Viz Artist

................................................. 226

10.2.1 Viz Artist User Interface

......................................................... 227

10.2.2 Creating Graphics

................................................................. 227

10.2.3 Adding Control Plug-ins

.......................................................... 232

10.2.4 Creating Backgrounds

............................................................ 233

10.2.5 Creating Backplates

.............................................................. 235

10.2.6 Creating Text Objects

.............................................................237

10.2.7 Creating Image Objects

..........................................................239

10.2.8 Creating Animations

.............................................................. 241

11 Creating Standalone Scenes

........................................................................245

12 Creating Transition Effects

.......................................................................... 253

12.1 Using the built-in Transition Effect features

.......................................... 253

12.2 Creating Transition Effect Scenes

....................................................... 254

13 Command Line Parameters

......................................................................... 257

14 Logging

...................................................................................................259

14.1 Viz Trio Log Levels

.......................................................................... 259

14.2 Viz Trio Log Files

............................................................................. 259

14.3 Viz Trio Error Messages

.................................................................... 260

14.4 Viz Engine Log Files

.........................................................................260

14.5 Media Sequencer Files

..................................................................... 261

14.6 Media Sequencer Logging

.................................................................261

15 Preview Server

......................................................................................... 263

16 Appendix

.................................................................................................265

16.1 Cherry Keyboard

............................................................................. 265

16.1.1 Editing Keys (green)

.............................................................. 265

16.1.2 Navigation Keys (white)

......................................................... 266

16.1.3 Program Channel Keys (red)

....................................................266

16.1.4 Preview Channel Keys (blue)

................................................... 267

16.1.5 Program and Preview Channel Keys (red and blue)

.......................267

16.2 Enabling Windows Crash dumps

........................................................ 268

16.3 Previous Trio Release highlights

......................................................... 268

Viz Trio User’s Guide

1 Introduction

This is the User’s Guide for Viz Trio.

Please take a moment to browse the Document Structure

section that gives an overview of this manual.

We also invite you to visit the documentation portal at documentation.vizrt.com for the latest updates to product manuals and complementary information.

This section contains information on the following topics:

About the Document

Words and Expressions

Customer Feedback and Suggestions

Customer Support Requests

1.1

1.1.1

About the Document

This manual covers the information needed in order to configure and operate Viz Trio.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Document Structure

Related Documents and information sources

Conventions

Document Structure

This user guide introduces and explains the different aspects of Viz Trio. Starting with an introduction to the user’s guide and Viz Trio’s latest and improved features.

If you are new to Viz Trio or need a refresher please start with

Introduction

(this

chapter) and Viz Trio Overview

.

Requirements and Installation describe the basic requirements for Viz Trio, its

integrated systems and installation.

Getting Started show the basic of how to start Viz

Trio. Startup parameters are described in Command Line Parameters .

User Interface and

Configuration Interface cover all aspects of the user interface

and configuration; for example how to use the Viz Trio keyboard, create shows, add templates and create pages of templates, how to configure the client’s output channels and so on.

The

Scripting

, Macro Language and

Macro Commands and Events chapters cover Viz

Trio’s scripting possibilities, its macro language, macro commands and scripting events.

Chapters

Designer ,

Creating Standalone Scenes and

Creating Transition Effects

cover some of the design aspects of Viz Trio using Viz Trio’s built-in Designer tool, how to create a basic lower third and how to use transition effects. For more advanced scene design refer to the Viz Artist User’s Guide.

Chapters

Command Line Parameters and

Logging

cover the command line startup parameters and logging capabilities.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 11

Viz Trio User’s Guide

1.1.2

1.1.3

The important Preview Server service is covered in Preview Server , while

Appendix

covers information not covered in other parts of the manual, including the old Cherry keyboard.

Related Documents and information sources

For complementary information, see the following documents:

Viz Artist User’s Guide: How to create standalone and transition logic scenes.

Viz Pilot User’s Guide: How to create a playlist in Viz Pilot that can be monitored in

Viz Trio, and use the Newsroom Component to create newsroom data elements for a newsroom system playlist.

Viz Engine Administrator’s Guide: How to configure your Viz Engines.

Viz One Administrator’s Guide: How to configure your Viz One system.

Viz One - Studio User’s Guide: How to work with your Viz One system.

We recommend you visit the Vizrt website at www.vizrt.com for news and information about products and updates.

Visit the documentation portal at documentation.vizrt.com for the latest updates to product manuals.

Conventions

The following typographic conventions are used in this document:

Italic is used for non-hyperlink external references, such as related documents,

books, or Internet pages. Italic is also used to emphasize words.

• The color blue is used for hyperlinked external references, and also internal references to sections or document elements (such as tables or figures) in the current document.

Bold refers to GUI components.

1.

Numbered paragraphs are used to indicate tasks that must be carried out.

1.2

Words and Expressions

The following is a number of common words and expressions used throughout the documentation:

Control Plug-ins: A graphics scene can contain all sorts of objects that can be controlled from a template such as text, back plates, images, colors and more. The graphics designer uses control plug-ins to expose objects as tab fields.

Control Object: Every scene with control plug-ins must have one instance of the control object plug-in at the root level of a scene tree. Control Object reads the information from all other control plug-ins. When a scene is imported to Viz

Template Wizard, it reads the information about other lower level control plug-ins through Control Object.

Forked Execution: With the new profile configuration, Viz Trio now supports forked execution by having more than one graphics render engine per channel. Simply put, you can trigger the same scene on multiple render engines where one can act as your backup.

Page 12 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

1.3

MAM-system: A Media Asset Management (MAM) system takes care of ingestion, annotation, cataloguing, storage, retrieval and distribution of digital media assets.

Viz Trio works together with Vizrt’s MAM-system Viz One.

Newsroom Component: In a Newsroom Computer System (NCS), the Newsroom

Component (NrC) is used to add data elements to a story. The user is typically a journalist working on a story. The NrC is an embedded application in the NCS that connects to a database of templates. The templates can be filled with text, images, video and maps.

Page: A page is based on a template and saved as a data instance of the template.

A page contains a set of data and references to where data (e.g. images and video clips) can be found. When a page is loaded, all static elements will be loaded from the template and the variable elements (items/tab fields) will be set to what they were when the page was saved. Therefore, a page is not saved as a complete scene. Just the values of the tab fields are saved together with a reference to the template-scene.

Note: Only pages can be taken on air.

Scene: A scene is built in Viz Artist. It can be a single scene, or one part (layer) of a combination of scenes (transition logic).

Template: A template is based on a Viz Artist scene, and is created by Viz Trio onthe-fly while importing it to Viz Trio. The template is used to create pages that are added to a show for playout. A template may be based on one or several (transition logic) scenes (known as a combination template).

Transition Logic Scene: A set of scenes built in Viz Artist. It contains one scene that controls the state of or toggles a set of scenes (layers). The layered scenes are used by the controlling scene to toggle in and out the layered scenes, using pre-configured or customized transitions effects, without the need to take scenes already on-air, off-air. For example; A lower third may be on-air at the same time as a bug, and the lower third may be taken off-air without taking the bug off-air or reanimating it.

Viz Artist: The design tool where the graphics scenes and all animations are created.

Viz Engine: The render output engine used for playout of graphics and video.

Customer Feedback and Suggestions

We encourage suggestions and feedback about our products and documentation.

To give feedback and, or suggestions, please identify your local Vizrt customer support team at www.vizrt.com.

1.

Click on Contact (top of page).

2.

The Vizrt office which is nearest to your location will be shown, or select from the list of Vizrt offices.

3.

Click on the Contact button for the office you want.

4.

Complete the required details in the window that opens.

Note: If this message is for Customer Support, and there is a Support Contract in place, then click on the ‘For support requests, please visit our support portal’ link in the message window.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 13

Viz Trio User’s Guide

A Vizrt representative will contact you as soon as possible.

1.4

1.4.1

1.4.2

Customer Support Requests

Support Requests are supported by Vizrt if customers have a valid Service Agreement in operation. Customers who do not have a Service Agreement and would like to set up

a Service Agreement should contact their regional sales representative (see Customer

Feedback and Suggestions ).

When submitting a Support Request, relevant and correct information should be given to Vizrt Support, to make sure that Vizrt Support can give the quickest and best solution to your Support Request.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Before Submitting a Support Request

Submitting a Support Request

Before Submitting a Support Request

Before a Support Request is submitted make sure that you:

Read:

• The relevant User Guide or Guides

• The release notes

and Check:

• That the system is configured correctly

• That you have the specified hardware, tested and recommended versions

Always refer to your Vizrt Service Level Agreement document.

Submitting a Support Request

When completing a Support Request, add as much information as possible.

Content of a Support Request

The report should contain information about these topics:

Problem description: Include a good description of what the problem is and how to reproduce it. Specify your workflow. Remember to use simple English.

Screen shots and illustrations: Use these to simplify the message. These are extremely useful for Vizrt Support.

Software configuration: Add exact versions of software (-build) used. This is also extremely important information.

System locale: Specify the Region and Language settings of the system.

System log files: Send the system log files (see Logging ).

Crash log files: Send the error report and crash log files from the crash (e.g. Viz

Trio program folder <viz install directory>).

Page 14 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Note: Check: If the operating system is Windows 7 and up, dump files can be stored at: <userdir>\AppData\Local\VirtualStore\<viz install directory> (check user rights).

System Config file: Send the system config file(s) (e.g. initialization files, Viz

Engine config file, and default.xml for the Media Sequencer).

Hardware configuration: Add exact versions of hardware used, especially for Viz

Engine.

Optional:

System setup: Describe differences in the installation, if any, from the recommended setup.

System Network: Add a description of how the network, bandwidth, routers, and switches are configured.

Always refer to your Vizrt Service Level Agreement document.

To submit the Support Request:

1.

On the www.vizrt.com page, click on Support.

2.

Click on Report a case.

3.

Click on LOG IN to login to the Customer and Partner portal.

4.

At the top of the Case Management page, click on Report a Case.

5.

In the online form complete the required minimum information (shown by a red asterisk) and click SAVE.

6.

In the saved Support Case that opens, complete the various text boxes and upload any required documents, files, etc. (see

Content of a Support Request ).

To track the status of open support tickets, login to the Customer and Partner portal.

Add information or communicate about the cases directly with the support team.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 15

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 16 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

2 Viz Trio Overview

Viz Trio is a graphics control system from Vizrt, which includes, but is not limited to, all the features of a typical character generator (CG) system. It is based on Viz Engine as the graphics rendering output system and Media Sequencer as the control supervisor for executing playout of media elements.

Trio allows users to trigger graphical elements stored as pages in a directory structure, with each page utilizing a unique call-up code. It also supports content entry in a

WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) manner. In addition to the basic CG features, it has a set of advanced features that gives the operator powerful graphical and operational possibilities, such as connecting to multiple newsroom systems, doing seamless context switches on graphics, using specialized editors that can change almost any property of a graphics, producing on-the-fly graphics with a built-in design tool, and more.

As a client to the Media Sequencer, the Viz Trio client can run on any computer that has a network connection to the Media Sequencer. For the local preview to function properly the computer must have an above average graphics card with OpenGL support.

This chapter contains information on the following topic:

System Overview

New Features in this version

2.1

System Overview

The system overview shown above depicts a basic setup of Viz Trio. The Viz Trio machine typically also has a Viz Engine for local preview.

As mentioned, the Trio operator will create pages, most often from pre-made templates created by graphic designers. A page is an instance of a template that can be customized with data values, like sports results or election data. When the page is ready, the Trio operator can easily send pages with the necessary information to air.

Trio will automatically use the Media Sequencer to trigger final rendering of the output by the Viz Engine.

Both Viz Trio, Media Sequencer and Viz Engine can be installed and operated on one machine, but most often Viz Trio, Media Sequencer and Viz Engine are on separate servers for performance and security reasons.

Viz Trio can also interface to various other systems for newsfeed and media resources.

For instance MAM systems such as Viz One for video and media resources and Viz Pilot.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 17

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Social Media feeds and news can be interfaced and ingested in the workflow with the

Viz Social-TV solution.

2.2

A more advanced setup is the newsroom and video integration which involves several other Vizrt products such as a Vizrt MAM system, Viz Pilot, Viz Gateway and third party systems such as a newsroom and database system.

Viz Gateway, using the MOS protocol, can be used to connect Viz Trio to most

Newsroom systems.

Note: The control application can also be Viz Pilot; however, Viz Pilot will also have a TCP/IP connection to the Oracle database.

New Features in this version

The Release Notes have a complete list of all the new features in this version of Viz Trio.

Some of the highlights:

• Simpler and better navigation including a new main window menu.

• Significant performance enhancements and bug fixes.

• The preview and the VTW panel can be floated.

• Support for 64-bit Viz Engine preview.

• And more, see the Release Notes for a complete list.

Page 18 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

3 Requirements and Installation

The following sections describe the different steps that are needed in order to have a multi client Viz Trio setup with a remote Media Sequencer connected to one or several

Viz Engine output renderers.

IMPORTANT! Always check release notes for information on supported versions of software, hardware requirements and last minute updates.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Prerequisites

General Requirements

Hardware Requirements

Viz Trio Software Requirements

Installing Viz Trio

Components and Applications used with Viz Trio

Upgrading Viz Trio

Video Codecs

Shared Data

Ports and Connections

3.1

3.2

Prerequisites

Before installing a Viz Trio system, make sure that the correct hardware and latest software is available. All needed software from Vizrt are accessible from Vizrt’s FTP server at download.vizrt.com. Contact your local Vizrt representative for credentials.

See Also

Hardware Requirements

Viz Trio Software Requirements

General Requirements

There are some general requirements for any Vizrt system to run. These requirements apply when setting up a complete system with integration to other Vizrt and third party software products:

• All machines should be part of the same domain.

• Users of the Vizrt machines should ideally be separated in at least two groups, administrators and designers/operators.

• Most machines running desktop applications must be logged in with sufficient privileges to run Vizrt programs, while services by default do not require users to be logged in.

• Vizrt servers must have static IP addresses.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 19

Viz Trio User’s Guide

3.3

3.4

• Vizrt recommends that customers who use remote shares for storing data use

UNC (Universal Naming Convention) paths directly in the configuration, instead of mapped drives. Example: \vosstore\images

• Vizrt has license restrictions on all Viz Engine and Viz Artist instances. To have an output of Vizrt generated graphics (preview and program channels), either a USB or a parallel port dongle on the renderer machine is required.

Caution: Third party systems that provide Vizrt systems with files must only use Microsoft Windows operating system compatible characters as the file name.

Hardware Requirements

Hardware requirements vary depending on the system purchased; however, every system delivered by Vizrt has an accompanying hardware specification sheet that, for a new system, matches the Software Requirements.

For older hardware that are used with newer versions of Vizrt software, such as Viz

Engine, it is always recommended to check against the current hardware specifications for the new software version to make sure that the latest software can run on the old hardware specification.

Additional hardware must always be checked to see if it is compatible with existing hardware. For example, the GPI cards supported by Vizrt must fit in the Media

Sequencer servers.

For more information on hardware specifications, please contact your local Vizrt customer support team.

Viz Trio Software Requirements

Recommended

• Windows 7 or Windows 8

• MS .NET Framework 4.5 or later

• Media Sequencer 2.0 or later

• Viz Engine 3.6 or later

Minimum

• Windows Vista

• MS .NET Framework 4.0

• Media Sequencer 1.23

• Viz Engine 3.0

Optional

• Viz One 5.6 (recommended), Viz One 5.3 (minimum)

• Preview Server 3.0 (recommended), Preview Server 1.0 (minimum)

• Viz Social TV 1.1 (recommended), Viz Social TV 1.0 (minimum)

• Local preview of videos requires codecs to be installed, see

Video Codecs

Page 20 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

3.5

Not Supported

• Windows XP (or lower)

• Viz Engine 2.8 (or lower)

Installing Viz Trio

1.

Make sure you have the correct hardware and software platform.

2.

Make sure that Viz Engine is installed and that you have a working local Graphic

Hub and Media Sequencer or have network credentials to the Graphic Hub and

Media Sequencer.

3.

Fetch the latest Viz Trio installer and Release Notes with ftp from download.vizrt.com/products/VizTrio/LatestVersion/

4.

Read the Release Notes carefully. They may contain important last minute information.

5.

Double-click the downloaded installer TrioClient-<VERSION>.msi and follow the installation instructions.

6.

Visit docs.vizrt.com to learn more about the software or press F1 / Help > View

Help to browse the local help.

IMPORTANT! You can only have one Trio installed on a server. If you have a previous version of Trio installed the previous version will be overwritten by the new Trio installer while trying to preserve most data/configuration settings.

Note: Various Vizrt products and components such as NLE (Non-Linear Editing) can share a Trio installation and hence will be upgraded if Trio is upgraded.

It is recommended to install Trio first, before these components. However, if these components are installed before Trio, Trio will be installed to the standard directory (C:\Program Files (x86)\vizrt\Viz Trio) even though it looks like you can choose a different directory to install to.

3.6

3.6.1

Components and Applications used with Viz Trio

This section contains information on the following topics:

Viz Engine

Media Sequencer

Viz Pilot

Viz Trio Keyboard

Viz Engine

The Viz Engine is the output service (renderer) for Viz Trio, and is a separate installer.

A renderer is needed in order for Viz Trio to preview graphics. You should make sure Viz

Engine is installed, configured and working before installing and using Viz Trio.

A licensed Vizrt dongle must be attached to the USB or printer port on the machine.

After installing the Viz Engine, make sure also to install additional plug-ins, such

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 21

Viz Trio User’s Guide

3.6.2

3.6.3

3.6.4

as Viz Datapool. The plug-ins needed will vary depending on the scene design and integrations.

To install the Viz Engine, refer to the instructions in Viz Engine Administrator's Guide.

Media Sequencer

The Media Sequencer is in most cases installed on a server acting as a middle tier between Viz Trio and Viz Engine.

To install the Media Sequencer

1.

Run the installer and follow the directions given by the installation wizard.

2.

Optional: Install the Oracle 10g Runtime Client.

• Restart the Media Sequencer after installing the database client.

• A database client is needed when connected to Viz Gateway for accessing the

Viz Pilot database.

Viz Pilot

In order to connect to Viz Pilot’s Oracle database, a runtime installation of the Oracle database client is required. It is recommended to use the same client version as the

Oracle database uses. After the client is installed, Viz Trio’s database connection can be configured. See Viz Pilot Users Guide for installation instructions at http:// docs.vizrt.com

See Also

Viz Pilot Database

Viz Trio Keyboard

To install the Viz Trio keyboard, the keyboard’s USB connector must be connected to the computer’s USB port. The computer should be able to detect and automatically install the needed keyboard driver(s).

Note: To learn more about the keyboard’s technical specifications, visit http:// www.devlin.co.uk/keyboards/semicust.html

DevlinGroup - Devlin Electronics

Limited.

To import the keyboard mapping file

1.

Open Viz Trio and click the Show properties button.

2.

In the Show properties window that opens, click the Keyboard button.

3.

In the Macros for Current Show window that opens, click Import.

4.

In the Import keyboard shortcuts dialog that opens, click the folder button to browse for and import the keyboard file (extension *.kbd).

5.

Optional: Select to merge the existing keyboard shortcuts with the new ones.

6.

Click Import.

See Also

Page 22 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

3.7

3.8

3.9

Viz Trio Keyboard

Upgrading Viz Trio

When upgrading from Trio 2.11 to Trio 2.12 or later: If any Viz One MAM storage devices

(previously known as VME Storage devices) have been set in the profile configuration in

Viz Trio 2.11, then they will have to be set up again after upgrading to Viz Trio 2.12 or

higher. If this is not done, video transfers will fail. See To add a video device

.

Video Codecs

Starting with Viz Trio version 3.1 is it no longer required to install separate video codecs at the Viz Trio client in order to use the Timeline editor. http://www.mainconcept.com/ eu/home.html

See Also

Timeline Editor

Shared Data

Vizrt recommends that customers who use remote shares for storing data use UNC

(Universal Naming Convention) paths directly in the configuration, instead of mapped drives.

Example: \vosstore\images

3.10

Ports and Connections

This section contains information on the following topics:

Viz Trio Port numbers

Multiplexing Port

3.10.1

Viz Trio Port numbers

Ports used by Trio

Component

trio.exe

Protocol

TCP

Port

6200

trionle.exe

TCP

6210

Description

Used for executing macro commands of the Viz Trio client over a socket connection.

Used by the Graphics Plugin for

NLE to utilize Viz Trio for effect editing.

3.10.2

Multiplexing Port

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 23

Page 24

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Multiplexing Ports

Ports

All other ports

Still Preview Port

MUX Isolated Port

MUX Shared Port

MUX Fixed Port

Viz Engine

The multiplexer functionality is an integral part of Viz Engine. When using Viz Engine a session management takes place internally, with one default session for the GUI and internal/external commands, and additional sessions created on-demand for the multiplexing ports or the preview port.

With multiplex ports, other than the MUX Still Preview port, the Viz Engine state is only switched when a command is received, which means a new session is created; hence, ten consecutive commands from a client will only result in one state switch on the first command.

With the MUX Still Preview port the state is switched when a command is received and immediately switched back to the main session such that on air rendering will not be hindered in any way.

The MUX Fixed port is traditionally used by Viz Pilot 4’s Newsroom Component, and is the same as the MUX Shared Port, except that allocated resources are never cleared from memory. To avoid memory overload, it is recommended to clean up the Viz Engine regularly when this port is used.

The MUX Shared Port is a shared port where all connections from one single host share one session. It is most often used by Viz Trio and the Newsroom Component to display preview frames.

The MUX Isolated Port is an isolated port where all connections get their own session.

It is used, for example in an NLE setup, to deliver frames to the host NLE-system when rendering or scrubbing video clips with graphics. Using this port will also suppress bounding box commands.

Note: The MUX Isolated Port cannot be used by the Newsroom Component.

Note: All multiplexing ports are supported by all Viz Engine versions.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

4 Getting Started

This section describes how to connect Viz Trio to the Media Sequencer and Viz Engine.

It also describes how to setup Viz Trio for playout.

Before the Viz Trio client is started make sure that it has a Media Sequencer, Viz Engine and Viz Graphic Hub installed, running and configured.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Hardware Configuration Versions

Basic Configuration and Startup

Configuring the Graphics Database

Configuring the Media Sequencer

4.1

4.1.1

4.1.2

Hardware Configuration Versions

Viz Trio can be configured in various ways; the traditional Viz Trio setup requires multiple PCs in order to run, while the single PC solution makes it possible to run everything on one machine.

Conventional Configuration

Single Machine Configuration (Viz Trio OneBox)

Conventional Configuration

Traditionally, each Viz Trio system has required two standard desktop PCs in order to operate; one machine for the Viz Trio client and one for its companion renderer Viz

Engine.

Single Machine Configuration (Viz Trio OneBox)

In addition to the traditional configuration type it is possible to run a complete Viz Trio system, including the Viz Engine, on a single standard PC (desktop or rack mountable).

The single PC solution provides all the features of a conventional Viz Trio setup. Two powerful graphics cards on-board makes sure that there is no negative impact on graphics quality or rendering speed. With the Viz Trio single PC setup, both the VGA preview and final program signals (playout) can be viewed on the same machine.

By consolidating two PCs down to one, the setup is suited for customers working in environments with limited space, such as mobile environments (OB vans and remote broadcasts) and smaller studios.

4.2

Basic Configuration and Startup

In order to start Viz Trio successfully, it needs a connection to the Media Sequencer and the local Viz Engine.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Connecting to Media Sequencer

Connecting to Viz Engine

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 25

Viz Trio User’s Guide

4.2.1

Starting Viz Trio

Connecting to Media Sequencer

Which connection a Viz Trio client has to the Media Sequencer is decided by parameters in the program target path. If no Media Sequencer target path parameter is set, Viz Trio will default to a local Media Sequencer.

To configure the Media Sequencer

4.2.2

4.2.3

• Right-click the Viz Trio desktop shortcut on the WIndows desktop and set a parameter for the -mse setting in the Target path.

Example: "C:\Program Files (x86)\vizrt\Viz Trio\trio.exe" -mse localhost -control lang en -loglevel 5

See Also

Command Line Parameters

Configuring the Media Sequencer

Connecting to Viz Engine

Viz Trio needs a local Viz Engine to run its preview and to be able to import scenes. Viz

Trio will detect and run Viz Engine itself.

All machines should be installed with the same Viz Engine version, and also share the same data.

IMPORTANT! For local preview, Viz Trio must have a hardware dongle installed.

See Also

Command Line Parameters

Configuring the Graphics Database

Starting Viz Trio

Viz Trio can be started in various ways.

To start Viz Trio

1.

Double-click the Viz Trio icon on the desktop, or

2.

Select the program from the Start menu (All Programs > Vizrt > Viz Trio > Viz

Trio), or

Page 26 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

4.3

3.

Select the Viz Trio .exe file from the program installation directory.

See Also

Command Line Parameters

Configuring the Graphics Database

Configuring the Media Sequencer

Configuring the Graphics Database

Viz Trio must be configured to access the same graphics data as the program and preview Viz Engine channels. The configuration is used for local preview in order to test and preview graphics before they are added to a show or playlist and played out on-air.

As all Viz Artist and Viz Engine machines in a Viz Trio system must use the same data, it is also recommended that the data is located on a high performance machine.

Configuring the Viz Graphic Hub database using Viz Trio can be done in three ways; at startup using the Viz Engine login window, through Viz Trio’s own configuration interface, or by setting command line options in Viz Trio’s target path.

Note: If Auto Login is set for Viz 3.x it is not possible for Viz Trio to alter the settings; however, this does not apply if Auto Login is set in the Viz Trio interface.

This section contains information on the following topics:

To configure the Viz 3.x database using Viz Config

To configure the Viz 3.x database using Viz Engine’s login window

To configure the Viz 3.x database using Viz Trio’s configuration window

To configure the Viz 3.x database using Viz Trio’s target path

To configure the Viz 3.x database using Viz Config

1.

Start the Viz Config tool and select the Database section.

2.

Enter the following connection parameters:

Host Name: Sets the database hostname.

Hub: Sets the database name.

Port Number: Sets the database port number. Default port is 84932.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 27

Page 28

Viz Trio User’s Guide

User: Sets the database user.

Auto Login: Sets login automatically when starting Viz Engine. If Auto Login is enabled it will override Viz Trio’s database login and disable its Database (Viz

3) configuration section.

3.

Click Save, and exit the application.

To configure the Viz 3.x database using Viz Engine’s login window

1.

Start Viz Trio.

2.

During startup, a login window for the database will appear.

3.

Enter the following connection parameters:

• Name server host, database, username, and password

4.

Select the Auto Login check box.

5.

Click OK to continue.

To configure the Viz 3.x database using Viz Trio’s configuration window

1.

Start Viz Trio with the following target parameter: -control

2.

Click the Config button (upper left) to open the

Configuration Interface .

3.

Select the Viz Graphic Hub section, and enter the following parameters:

• Name server host, database, username, and password

4.

Select the Auto Login check box.

5.

Click Apply to save the settings, and exit the Configuration Interface

.

The change of database is immediate, however, to see the change when importing scenes it might be necessary to refresh the Import Scenes view.

Note: If Auto Login is set using the Viz Config tool or Viz Engine login window (not

Viz Trio) the Viz Trio Viz Graphic Hub configuration section will be disabled.

To configure the Viz 3.x database using Viz Trio’s target path

• Add the following parameters to Viz Trio's target path: –vizdb

<host>:<server>:<username>:<password>

Note: Command line options will not override the database configuration if Auto

Login is set using the Viz Config tool or Viz Engine login window (not Viz Trio), however, it will override settings configured using Viz Trio.

Tip: Check that the correct database is available when selecting Import Scenes.

See Also

Viz Engine Administrator’s Guide

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

4.4

Configuring the Media Sequencer

The Media Sequencer is a core component for managing shows and playlists.

The Media Sequencer can run in either service or console mode. It is generally recommended to run the Media Sequencer as an automatically started service process.

You can select this mode by ticking the “Launch on system startup” checkbox at the

Media Sequencer startup-screen. Console-mode is mostly used when configuring the system or for debug/test purposes. It is recommended to run the Media Sequencer on a dedicated server for optimal performance.

When using Viz Pilot’s Oracle database an Oracle database client is needed. If the

Media Sequencer is running as a service, it is recommended that the service logs on with a user account, and not with the default Local System account (SYSTEM). This is due to the fact that Oracle’s OCI library is installed per user, hence the System user is not able to read environment variables set for a user.

To allow the Media Sequencer service to log on with a user account

1.

Open the Administrative Tools found under Windows’ Control Panel.

2.

Open the Services window.

3.

Right-click the Media Sequencer service, and on the appearing context menu, click Properties.

4.

In the dialog box that appears, click the Log On tab.

5.

Select the This account option, and enter the account information.

6.

When done, click OK.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 29

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 30 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5 User Interface

This section describes the Viz Trio client’s user interface for playout. The Viz Trio client’s

Designer and

Configuration Interface is not described in this section.

Trio User Interface overview:

Trio has three main areas (1,2,3 in the figure above) as well as a top main menu and status lines with options at the bottom of the main window. The various options and menu choices will be explained in detail later in this chapter.

• On the top you have the main menu giving easy access to various functions grouped into sections

Menu option File , Menu option Page

,

Menu option Playout

,

Menu option View

, Menu option Tools and Menu option Help .

• [1] On the left section of the screen you select and work with Templates, Pages,

Pageview and edit tab-values. Tab values are data entry points in templates and pages you can edit before the finished pages are played out.

• [2] In the top right area you have editors and inspectors to view, select and change various properties for the objects you are working with.

• [3] In the bottom right area you have the preview window. Starting with Trio 3 the preview window can be detached allowing you for example to have the preview on a second monitor. Note: Viz Template Wizard pages can also be floated (detached) from the main Trio window.

• On the bottom you have status bars with various status information.

This chapter contains information on the following topics:

Main menu

Undo and Redo

Playout and Design Mode

Viz Artist Mode

On Air Mode

Slave Mode

Show Modes

Show Control

Template List

Page List

Create New Scroll

Edit Show Script

Snapshot

Render Videoclip

Search Media

Import Scenes

Graphics Preview

Video Preview

TimeCode Monitor

Field Linking and Feed Browsing in Viz Trio

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 31

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.1

Playlist Modes

Tab Fields Window

Status Bar

Page Editor

Timeline Editor

Viz Trio Keyboard

Main menu

The main menu is located immediately below the top main window bar and gives easy access to many functions and workflows:

The main menu sections are shortly explained below. For some menu items a more detailed explanation can be found later in this chapter.

Menu option File

File

Open Show...

Open External Playlist...

New Page View...

New Show Playlist...

Configuration

Show Properties

Import Show Archive...

Slave Mode

Quit

Menu option Page

Meaning

Show a directory panel to open a TrioShow

Show a directory panel to open an external playlist

Add a new page view

Add a new playlist

Show the Configuration window where you configure

Trio

View and configure properties for a TrioShow

Import a TrioShow from disk

Set Trio in Slave Mode, see Slave Mode

To quit Trio

Page

Save

Save As...

Rename...

Change Template...

Meaning

Save the current page you are working on

Save the current page you are working on with a new name

Rename the current page you are working on

Change the template for a page

Page 32 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page

Refresh Linked Data

Reimport

Delete

Delete All

Save to XML...

Load from XML...

Print/Save Snapshot...

Move to Number...

Move with Offset...

Copy to Number...

Copy with Offset...

Menu option Playout

Playout

Take

Pause

Continue

Meaning

Will asyncronously refresh the data for a page linked to a feed.

Reimport the template design for a page

Delete the currently selected page. You will be asked for confirmation.

Delete all pages. You will be asked for confirmation.

Save page to an XML-file on disk

Load page from an XML-file on disk

Take a Snapshot. The snapshot can be printed or saved to disk.

Move page to a specific number

Move page with offset

Copy page to a specific number

Copy page with offset

Out

Cue

Cue Append

Take and Read Next

Cleanup Channels

Meaning

Performs a direct take on the selected page.

Pause the current element.

Continues the animation on the selected page, or any that is loaded in the same transition logic layer as the selected page.

Takes out the selected page, or any that is loaded in the same transition logic layer as the selected page. Hard cut.

Prepare the clip for playout so the first frame is ready in the player.

Prepare the clip for playout. The clip will start automatically when the current clip ends.

Takes current element and reads next.

Will clean up the renderers (Viz Engines) currently in use by the open show. Asks for confirmation. This will free up renderer memory

and realtime capacity. See Cleanup Channels

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 33

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 34

Playout

Initialize Show on Channels

Initialize Show on Local Preview

Loads the selected show on the Preview

renderers. See Initialize Channels

Update on Program

Update on External Preview

Clear Program

Update on Program renderer without reloading or rerunning animations. Only for Transition

Logic scenes.

Update on Preview renderer without reloading or rerunning animations. Only for Transition

Logic scenes.

Takes out the scene on Program renderer, but will not clean up the renderer (scenes will remain in memory).

Clear external Preview

Meaning

Loads the selected show on the program and preview renderers. See

Initialize Channels .

Start Scroll

Stop Scroll

Continue Scroll

Arm Current

Arm Selected

Takes out the scene on Preview renderer, but will not clean up the renderer (scenes will remain in memory).

Start Scroll. See Scroll Control

Stop Scroll. See Scroll Control

Continue Scroll. See Scroll Control

Arm Current. See

Arm and Fire

Arm Selected. See

Arm and Fire

Unarm Current

Unarm All

Fire All

Unarm Current. See Arm and Fire

Unarm of All. See

Arm and Fire

Fire All Armed. See Arm and Fire

Menu option View

View

Expert Mode

Tabfields

Commands

Errors

Running Carousels

Meaning

Toggle. Enable Trio to operate in export mode.

Toggle. Enable tabfields.

Show the command window. In this window you can execute Viz Trio macros and commands using a command-line (cli) interface.

Show the error message window.

Show the task window where all running tasks in in the active profile will be displayed.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.2

5.3

5.4

View

Refresh Thumbnails

Menu option Tools

Tools

Viz Artist

Time Code Monitor

FeedStreamer

Meaning

Force refresh off all thumbnails.

Meaning

Switch over to Viz Artist. Trio will keep running. While in

Artist, click the Trio button to return to Trio again. See Viz

Artist Mode

Start the TimeCode Monitor. See TimeCode Monitor

.

Start the Feedstreamer moderation tool. See Field Linking and Feed Browsing in Viz Trio .

Start the Design Tool. See Playout and Design Mode .

Trio Designer

Menu option Help

Help

View Help

Legal Notices

About...

Meaning

Show help and documentation.

Information about third-party codelibs and Viz Trio licensing.

Displays which Viz Trio version and build that has been installed on your machine (essential information to attach when reporting issues to Vizrt), Credits and Legal Notices.

Undo and Redo

The global functions trio:undo and trio:redo are mapped to Ctrl+Z (undo) and Ctrl+Y

(redo). Currently the undo only applies for deleted playlist entries, but the reach for the undo action will be expanded in future versions of Trio.

Playout and Design Mode

Clicking Tools > Trio Designer from the main menu, when in playout mode, will

switch the user interface to design mode, displaying the Designer tool. Viz Trio provides

a library of pre-defined design objects for easy creation of new scenes. The various design objects are grouped together in order to create more advanced graphics.

Click Tools > Trio Designer again to return to playout mode.

Viz Artist Mode

Viz Trio templates are based on scenes created in Viz Artist. From the main menu, click

Tools > Viz Artist to start Viz Artist, opening the template’s scene that is currently

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 35

Viz Trio User’s Guide loaded in Viz Trio’s preview window. In Viz Artist it is possible to edit the scene, and save the changes.

When in Viz Artist mode, Viz Artist will have a button labelled Trio in the upper right corner. Click the Trio button to return to Viz Trio.

5.5

5.6

5.7

When back in playout mode a confirmation dialog appears, asking if the page on the program and preview renderers should be reloaded. The template is reimported automatically.

On Air Mode

On the top bar to the right there is a button that takes Viz Trio on and off-air. When in on-air mode, the OnAir button is red.

Slave Mode

Select the main menu switch File > Slave Mode to enable/disable slavemode.

Slave mode means that any other Viz Trio client connected to the same Media

Sequencer, which is not in slave mode, is in effect master.

A master will trigger the slaves to change the show folder when they change. This functionality typically make sense when the commands to change the folder are issued from a newsroom system, the newsroom system is then master.

To exit slave mode, click Main menu option File > Slave Mode again.

Show Modes

Before version 2.11, Viz Trio supported two show modes; traditional shows where

templates and pages were part of the same view, and Context-enabled Shows where

templates and pages are split in two views. From version 2.11, Viz Trio only supports

Context-enabled Shows

.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Context-enabled Shows

User-defined Contexts

Page 36 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.7.1

Context-enabled Shows

A context-enabled show has the possibility to switch concepts and variants within a show. For example a News concept could be switched to a Sports concept. Within that concept there could be variants of a specific scene (e.g. lower and top third).

Graphics for all these variations must be made, but once they are available and imported into Viz Trio, they can literally be switched and played out by the touch of a button.

All variants of a scene, within a specific concept, will be shown as one template in Viz

Trio’s

Template List

.

For a show to successfully use context-enabled scenes in Viz Trio, the folders and scene names in Viz must follow a certain naming convention, giving them properties and values for Viz Trio to recognize and use.

The conventions are as follows:

Type

Concept

(folder)

Context

(folder)

Userdefined

Variant

(file)

Property Name Example

concept = <conceptname> concept=<conceptname> concept=News concept=Sport concept=Weather

<context> = <contextname> <context>=<contextname> aspect=16x9 aspect=4x3 platform=HD platform=SD

_variant = <variantname> <scene>_variant=<variantname> banner_variant=Lower banner_variant=Top chart_variant=Graph chart_variant=Line adds_variant=Adds adds_variant=NoAdds weather_variant=3DayForecast weather_variant=1DayForecast

IMPORTANT! For the variants it is important to add an underscore "_" to separate the scene name from the variant’s keyword.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 37

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.7.2

User-defined Contexts

Viz Trio supports the creation of user-defined contexts. The number of user-defined contexts is unlimited. However, user-defined contexts are only controllable through the

Viz Trio command-line editor. The examples below show Viz Trio commands used with the user-defined contexts Aspect and Platform: show:set_context_variable Aspect 16x9 show:set_context_variable Platform HD show:set_context_variable X Y

Tip: User-defined contexts can be controlled using Viz Trio commands, which in turn can be used to create user-defined macro commands for use with scripts and shortcut keys.

See Also

Macro Commands and Events

, and in particular the VizBoldshow commands.

5.8

Show Control

The Show Control user interface is used to manage the show before, during and after a show is taken on-air.

The Show control gives access to previous shows, Viz Pilot playlists, newsroom playlists and the possibility to create new shows and show playlists.

Note that there are differences between a show, show playlist and a playlist, especially in the way they are managed and monitored. This section and the following subsections will describe some of these differences.

The Show Control view contains several buttons that in turn opens different options. In short they can be described as such:

Change Show: Displays the

Show Directories pane.

Add Page View: Opens the Add Page List View dialog box.

Create Playlist: Opens the Create Playlist

dialog box.

Show Properties: Opens the

Show Properties window.

Cleanup Renderers: Cleans up all data on the renderers (see the

Cleanup

Channels section).

Initialize: Initializes the show on the renderers (see the Initialize Channels

section).

Show Concept: Displays the show’s concept, for example Sport or News.

Callup Code: Shows the callup code for the next page to be read from the page list.

Read Page: Reads the page that has the callup code shown in the Page To Read window.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Show Directories

Page 38 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.8.1

Add Page List View

Create Playlist

Show Properties

Cleanup Channels

Initialize Channels

Show Concept

Callup Page

Show Directories

Clicking the Change Show button displays the Show Directories view.

A

Shows

tab and a Playlists

tab are displayed by default. However, for compatibility with previous Viz Trio versions, a

Viz Directories

view is also available.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Viz Directories

Shows

Context Menu

Import Show

Export Show

Playlists

Import Show

Export Show

To create a show folder

To create a new show

To import an exported show

Viz Directories

The Show logic is the recommended way of organizing pages. However, it is also possible to set the path by choosing a Viz Artist folder for each show. To do this, choose the Viz directories tab below the Show Directories heading.

Note: The Viz directories tab is by default disabled. Open the Configuration, and in the User Interface/User Restrictions section enable Browse viz directories when

changing shows.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 39

Viz Trio User’s Guide

When the Viz Artist folder is set and pages are imported, a show folder with the same path and name will be created in the Shows view. To keep using the Viz Artist directory workflow, where each show is tied to a Viz Artist folder, simply ignore the Shows view.

It is possible to switch at anytime to using the Shows view logic. However, after creating show folders with paths that differ from the Viz Artist scene data structure, and where there is more than one show per folder, these shows can only be accessed using the Shows view.

Shows

From version 2.11, Viz Trio only supports Context-enabled Shows . Shows also has

the possibility to create a Create Playlist

in order to playout pages in a carousel like manner.

All scenes added to a show are added to the Templates list.

A show folder is used to organize shows that for instance belong to a certain show or production. Scenes from the whole Viz Artist scene tree can be imported into a show.

Page 40

The two panes, Folders and Shows, have context menus that provide some options for show management.

The buttons are used for creating new shows, and to import and export shows. The

Import and Export Show buttons allow a show to be exported or imported with all Viz

Artist archives, Viz Trio pages, page views, local macros and key bindings, database setups, script units and so on.

Context Menu

Folders pane:

Add folder: Creates a new show folder at any level in the tree structure.

Rename folder: Renames any folder at any level in the tree structure.

Delete folder: Deletes any folder at any level in the tree structure.

Caution: Export or delete all shows and sub-folders before deleting a root folder.

Shows pane:

Rename Show: Renames an existing show.

Create Show: Creates a new show.

Delete Show: Deletes an existing show.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Export Show: Exports an existing show. Selecting this option opens the Export

Show window.

It is possible to move a show to a different Show folder by drag and drop. Select a show and drag and drop it into the new folder location.

Import Show

Clicking the Import show button opens the Import Show dialog.

If importing a non context-enabled show, created when working with previous Viz Trio versions, a dialog will appear during import, asking if the show should be converted into a context-enabled show type. When confirming this question, the show will automatically be converted to context-enabled upon import.

File name: Sets the path to the show to be imported. When clicking the browse button, a browse dialog opens allowing a show file (*.trioshow) to be selected.

Archive Items: For details, see the Export Show

section.

Update Renderers After Import: Reloads all scenes on the renderers.

Import into current show: Imports templates and pages into the current show.

Import into: Imports templates and pages into a specified, suggested, or new show.

Merge: When checked, this option will merge templates and pages into the existing show.

Templates: Lists all templates in the file.

Select all (button): Selects all templates.

Deselect all (button): Deselects all templates.

Pages: Lists all in the file.

Select all (button): Selects all pages.

Deselect all (button): Deselects all pages.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 41

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Expand all (button): Expands all nodes.

Collapse all (button): Collapses all nodes.

Offset: Sets the numeric value used for pages that are imported with offset values.

If a page has callup code 1000, and the offset is 100, the new code will be 1100.

Note that only pages can be merged with an offset.

Overwrite Existing Pages: If the callup codes already exists in the show, the pages will be overwritten by the imported pages.

Skip Existing Pages: If callup codes already exists in the show, the pages will not be overwritten by the imported pages.

Note: The default is to import all elements present in the show archive.

Export Show

Clicking the Export show button opens the Export Current Show dialog.

Page 42

Viz archive (scenes, images, materials, objects): Viz Engine archives should normally be included in an export. An exception is when the export is done to the same data root, or a data root with the same structure and content as the one exported from.

Elements (templates, groups and pages): Includes all the show’s templates, groups and pages.

Page views: Maintains the show’s page view organization.

Show Macros and Key Bindings: Includes the show’s macro and key shortcut specifications (see the

Show Properties

sections).

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Script units: Includes the show’s script units that are stored on the Media

Sequencer (show scripts). File scripts must be added manually to Associated files

(see the Show Properties

section).

VTW Templates: Includes the show’s Viz Template Wizard templates.

• Databases: Includes the show’s database setups.

Variables: Includes the show’s stored variables (for example a counter) and their

intermediate information (see the Show Variables section).

Show Playlists: Includes the show playlists that are created as part of the Viz Trio show, hence, this is not related to Viz Pilot and newsroom playlists.

Associated Files: Includes the show’s associated files (see the

Show Properties

section).

Select all (button): Selects all associated files.

Deselect all (button): Deselects all associated files.

Note: The export file extension is *.trioshow.

To create a show folder

1.

Click the Change Show (folder) button to open the Show Directories view, and click on the Shows tab.

2.

Right click the Folders pane, and from the appearing context menu select Add

folder.

To create a new show

1.

Click the Create show button, or right-click the shows pane area and select

Create Show on the appearing context menu.

2.

Enter a name for the new show in the appearing text field.

3.

Double-click the new entry in the show pane to open the show.

To import an exported show

1.

From the Viz Trio main user interface, click the Change Show button.

2.

In the Show Directories view under the Shows tab, click the Import Show button to

open the Import Show dialog.

3.

Browse for the show which is saved as a *.trioshow file.

• When the file is selected the dialog will enable the archived elements.

4.

Select the elements of the archive to import.

5.

Select if the show should be merged into an existing show.

• If the show is to be merged, select the templates and pages to import.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 43

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• Set the page offset if pages are not to merged with pages using the same callup code range.

• Select whether to overwrite existing pages or to skip existing pages. This only has an effect on pages with the same callup code.

6.

Select if the show should be imported into the current show or a new location.

7.

Click the Import button to start the import.

To export the current show

1.

From the Viz Trio main user interface, click the Change Show button.

2.

In the Show Directories view under the Shows tab, click the Export Show

button to open the Export Current Show dialog.

3.

Enter a filename for the archive.

4.

Optional: Select what to include in the exported archive. By default all options are selected.

5.

Optional: Browse and select a folder where the archive will be stored. The folder last used is selected as default.

6.

Click the Export button to start the export.

IMPORTANT! The show being exported must be loaded in Viz Trio.

Playlists

The Playlists tab allows the operator to open a Viz Pilot and/or newsroom playlist. With a Viz Pilot or newsroom system integration, Viz Trio can be used to playout Viz Pilot and newsroom elements.

Page 44

Name: Shows the names of the playlists provided by the newsroom control system.

Start: Specifies the start time of the various playlists.

Duration: Shows the duration of each playlist.

Host: Indicates the host of a determined playlist.

Channel ID: Shows the ID of the channel assigned to a playlist.

Status: Indicates a playlist’s current state.

Active: Indicates the currently active playlist.

Note: Newsroom playlists are by default read only; however, there is a Import/

Export Settings

setting that can be disabled to allow editing of MOS playlists.

See Also

Playlist Modes

Viz Pilot Database

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.8.2

MOS

Add Page List View

Clicking the Create page view button adds a filtered Page List view. There are no limits to the number of Page List views.

5.8.3

When a new view is created, a callup code range must be specified (for example 1000 to 2000). All pages within that range will be displayed in the new view. The original views, such as the template and/or page list, remain unchanged. The additional views are filtered views of the main view.

Note: The traditional show view will also list templates in the filtered Page List view.

Create Playlist

Clicking the Create Playlist button creates a show playlist that can be filled with Viz

Trio pages, Viz Pilot and newsroom data elements.

To create a show playlist

1.

Click the Create Playlist button, and in the dialog that opens, enter a playlist description.

2.

Drag pages from the current show to the Show Playlist.

See Also

Playlist Modes

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 45

5.8.4

Show Properties

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 46

Show name: Name of the show.

Description: Description of the show.

Default Viz scene path: Default Viz Engine path for imported scenes.

Library Path: Sets the library path used by the Viz Trio Designer (see

Resources

).

Timing handler: When a time code card is installed, a time code handler can be

set (see the Time Codes section).

Preview background image: Sets the image path for the preview background

image. For more information about preview modes, see Preview modes RGB, Key and RGB with background image.

Active VTW template: Sets a Viz Template Wizard template to be used for the current show. Clicking the browse button opens the VTW Templates: Current Show window. From this window templates can be imported, exported or removed. When a template is set for a show it is displayed as part of the Show Control. The resulting

VTW window created can also be un-docked (or floated) from the main Trio window by clicking the pin-button: . When the VTW window is floated, clicking the pinbutton again will re-attach the VTW window to the main Trio window.

Note: For information on how to export Viz Pilot templates, see the Viz Pilot

User’s Guide or Viz Template Wizard User’s Guide.

Show Script: Sets a show script that acts as a global script for all templates and pages.

Transition Path: Configures the show’s transition effects’ scene path. Effects are set per page.

Default Effects (ellipse button): Opens the Default Effects window where you can select Default Video/Still Effect and Default Scene Effect from a dropdown. If no effects are selected, default effect settings will be used, which will be sufficient for most usages.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• Databases (ellipse button): Opens the Database Config editor that allows you

To create a new database connection

for linking tab fields to values in a database or

file (e.g. Microsoft Excel and Unicode Support ).

• In early versions of Viz Trio there was only support for database linking of text properties. It was possible to link a value of a single text property to one cell within a spreadsheet. This is called scalar linking as it is only possible to hold one value at a time.

• In more recent versions of Viz Trio table properties were added, and introduced the concept of table linking, where the contents of the table property were linked to the contents within a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Thus it is possible to link several rows or columns at once.

• It's important to understand the principle difference between the two as they

manifest in different versions of the database link editor (see the Database

Linking

section).

Associated Files: Displays a list of associated show files, for example video and audio clips to the show. The files are saved with the show when it is exported.

Add File: Opens a Windows file browser to browse for and add a file to the current Show Settings.

Delete File(s): Removes the selected file from the current Show Settings.

Delete All: Removes all associated files from the current Show Settings.

Associated Viz Folders (not recursive): Displays a list of associated show folders. The files are saved with the show when it is exported. When imported it is imported as part of the Viz archive option.

Add Folder: Opens a Viz Engine browser to browse for and add scene, image, geom, material or font folders to the current Show Settings.

Delete Folder: Removes the selected folder from the current Show Settings.

Delete All: Removes all associated folders from the current Show Settings.

Customize colors by double clicking the color boxes: Double-click on the color boxes to customize show specific character colors (see also how

To edit the text color ).

This section contains information on the following topics:

To open show settings

To set the transition effects path

To create a new database connection

To edit a connection

To remove a connection

To open show settings

• Click the Show settings button.

To set the transition effects path

1.

Click the Show Settings button to open the

Show Properties pane.

2.

Click the ellipse (...) button next to the Transition Path.

3.

Search Viz for the transitions effects folder, and click OK.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 47

Viz Trio User’s Guide

4.

Click OK to close the Show Settings window.

Note: The effects folder should ideally be placed according to the Viz Pilot preferences which is at the root of the Viz database.

To create a new database connection

1.

Click the Databases settings’ ellipse (...) button in the Show Settings section to open the Database Config.

2.

Click Add database to open the Add New Database Connection window.

Page 48

3.

Enter a Name for the connection and select one of the following options:

4.

Option 1: OLE DB

1.

Click the Connection string’s ellipse (...) button to configure the Data Link

Properties

2.

Select an OLE DB provider, and click Next.

3.

Add the connection parameters.

4.

Click the Test Connection button.

5.

Option 2: Microsoft Excel

• Click the Microsoft Excel button to use a spreadsheet. Note that configuring an Excel spreadsheet will automatically set the correct provider.

6.

Click the Test connection button.

7.

Click the Lookup column’s ellipse (...) button to choose lookup column.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Note: When clicking the Lookup column’s ellipse (...) button, if connection parameters are correct, the connection button will turn green.

8.

Optional: Select if the lookup column type should be string or integer.

Note: Specifying the lookup column is only necessary in scalar linking cases.

Note: A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet column is used to match a key value in order to select the scalar value for the text property. For table linking it can be left blank.

9.

Specify whether the database should be available to all shows.

Available to all shows: Shows/pages that are exported and imported into other shows will also import the Excel file and database link settings.

10. Click OK to save the database connection.

To edit a connection

• Double-click the database connection to open the Edit Database Connection

<name> window.

To remove a connection

5.8.5

• Click the Delete Database button in the configuration dialog.

See Also

Page Editor

section on

Database Linking

Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros

Macro Language

Macro Commands and Events

Scripting

Cleanup Channels

This function clears all loaded graphics from memory for the page list and all the playlists on the program and preview renderers for the output profile currently in use. It

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 49

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.8.6

should be used before initializing a new show or in order to re-initialize the same show into the renderer’s memory.

Note: Cleanup commands will affect all Viz Trio clients that are connected to the same Media Sequencer, and using the same output profile.

See Also

Initialize Channels

• Macro Commands: trio:cleanup, trio:cleanup_channel and trio:cleanup_renderers in

Macro Commands and Events chapter.

Initialize Channels

The Initialize button loads the current show’s graphics on the preview and program renderers.

Note: In case of transition logic scenes, the state of background scenes will be reset.

Initialize does not refresh everything (it performs a load, not a reload on the Viz

Engine). If changes have been made to a scene that was already loaded, a Cleanup renderer command must be issued, and thereafter an Initialize command.

Each playlist and pagelist elements have its own initialize indicator. The Loaded column will for each element indicate status with percentage and a color-code; Yellow: loading and Green: loaded.

A progress indicator icon will indicate the load for all elements in the pagelist or playlist with a tooltip indicating in percent total load.

Several shows can be initialized if necessary. After having initialized the first, another show can be switched to and initialized. The graphics for the first one will still be there, ready for use.

When initializing shows that require a lot of memory, please take the memory use on the program and preview renderers into consideration when loading the graphics.

Too much graphics on the renderer(s) will use up all physical memory, causing the performance to drop below real-time, which in turn may cause the renderer(s) to become unstable.

Note: Initialize commands will affect all Viz Trio clients that are connected to the same Media Sequencer, and using the same output profile.

See Also

Cleanup Channels

Page 50 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.8.7

Macro Commands and Events trio:initialize_show_or_playlist

Show Concept

A concept can be switched directly from the Show Control . It is also possible to switch

concepts using context variables in a macro or a script.

5.8.8

Switching concepts for a show’s playlist is done in the same way as for a show; however, they can also be switched independently. Concept <Default> refers to the concept the page was saved with. If none of the available concepts is chosen one menu option will be blank.

See Also

Show, Context and Tab-field Commands

Callup Page

Part of the show control is a field and a button used for selecting and reading specific pages. When the pages are read, they are also opened in the

Page Editor .

To read a page

• Enter the page’s callup code (number) using the keyboard’s numeric pad, and press the plus (+) key or the Read Page button to read the page.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 51

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.9

Template List

Page 52

The Template List, unlike the traditional Page List, only contains templates. A separate

Page List contains the pages derived from the templates.

Template variants can be switched directly from the

Template List

and

Page List

, or

from the Page Editor

. As with concepts, variants can also be switched using a macro command in a user-defined macro or a script.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Template Context Menu

Columns

Combination Templates

To create a combination template

Template Context Menu

The Template List has its own context menu for creating combinations of templates, assigning scripts and so on.

Select Thumbnail: Use this option to select which thumbnail to show for the template.

Create ComboTemplate: Opens the Combo Template Editor, from where it is possible to create a combination template that contains all selected templates. This

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide is only relevant for transition logic templates. All templates that are to be merged into

Combination Templates

must be in different transition logic layers.

Edit Alternatives: Opens a dialog for viewing scene information, such as concept, variant, user-defined contexts (platform) and scene path, associated with a template.

Delete Selected Templates: Deletes a template, or templates, from the Template

List.

Reimport: Updates any scenes that have been changed.

Script: Includes all script related options:

Edit Show Script: Opens the Choose Show Script window, where it is possible to edit the script assigned to the show.

Tip: The Choose Show Script window can also be opened by selecting Edit

Show Script from the

Page Editor drop-down menu, or by clicking the Show

Script browse button in the Show Properties

window. See also To assign a script to a show .

Assign Script: Assigns a script to a template. It is not possible to assign scripts to pages. A page references the template script.

New: Creates a new blank script. The script can be saved to a local or shared repository, or to the Media Sequencer.

File: Clicking the Browse ... button opens a file browser on the local computer.

This menu also includes a list of the names of the scripts already assigned to the selected template.

Media Sequencer: Selects scripts placed on the Media Sequencer.

Clear: Clears the assigned script.

Note: To edit the show script, see the

Scripting section.

Columns

Description: Shows the contents of the template tab fields.

Icon: Shows the thumbnail image of the scene.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 53

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Layer(s): Shows which layer, [FRONT], [MAIN], [BACK], the scene belongs to.

Name: Shows the name of the template.

Variant: Shows the variants for the template. For example lower, top and full screen.

Auto Width: Adjusts the column width automatically.

Enable Sorting: Toggles the ability to sort by column on/off.

Clear Sorting: Clears any sorting performed by the user when clicking the column headers.

Combination Templates

A combination template can only be created using transition logic templates. In order to create a combination template, the templates must be in different layers (view Layer information in the see the Template List’s

Columns

or the Page List’s Pagelist Columns ).

To create a combination template

1.

Right-click a transition logic template in the Template List .

2.

From the context menu that appears, click Create ComboTemplate.

3.

In the Combo Template Editor that opens:

• Select the layers/states that should be activated for this combo template (only one state per layer can be selected).

• Enter a Description.

• Enter a Name (no space is allowed in the combo template name).

• Click the Save button.

See Also

Pagelist Context Menu

Columns

Pagelist Columns

5.10

Page List

The Page List shows the list of accessible pages. Pages are created from templates.

Templates in turn, are normally created by importing scenes created with Viz Artist.

You can think of an template as a blueprint while pages are instances or real objects

Page 54 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide created from templates. From one template you can create as many pages as you like and each of the created pages are unique with a page-id.

A page can be played out from a page list or from a show playlist. The page list can play its pages one by one. A show playlist has the option of creating a carousel, playing the items like a scheduled playlist. It can also be looped.

Pages are edited using the

Page Editor

Controls

, and its available editors. Most page editors are made available to the operator by the scene designer through exposed scene properties within the scene. Others, like a database connection, are made

available through the Show Properties

window or by using more advanced features such as

Macro Commands and Events .

This chapter contains information on the following topics:

Pagelist Context Menu

Pagelist Columns

Create Groups

Copy and Paste Groups

Channel Not Found

Manually Sorting Pages

To select a variant from the page list

To create a page

To read a page

To edit a page

To delete a page

To take pages on-air

To save to XML ...

To load from XML...

Time Codes

Arm and Fire

Pagelist Context Menu

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 55

Viz Trio User’s Guide

A right-click on any element in the page list activates the context menu. Select a menu item to perform an action or define a setting for a page. Clicking an image icon will open a drop-list of available template variants.

Page 56

Note: The menu options Create Combo Page and Script are now part of the

Template List ’s context menu.

Direct Take: Performs a direct take on the selected page.

Continue: Continues the animation on the selected page, or any that is loaded in the same transition logic layer as the selected page.

Out: Takes out the selected page, or any that is loaded in the same transition logic layer as the selected page.

Read: Performs a read on the selected template or page.

• Pause: Pause the current element.

Cue: Prepare the clip for playout so the first frame is ready in the player.

Cue Append: Prepare the clip for playout. The clip will start automatically when the current clip ends.

Prepare: Prepare the clip in the pending player without affecting the current clip, so it is ready to be played out. The clip will not start automatically after the current clip. Requires Viz Engine 3.3 or above.

• Initialize: Loads the selected page(s) on the program and preview renderer.

• Cut: Cut an element to the pasteboard (shortcut: Ctrl+x)

• Copy: Copy an element to the pasteboard (shortcut: Ctrl+c)

• Paste: Paste in the current pasteboard element (shortcut: Ctrl+v)

• Delete: Delete the current selected element.

• Create Group: Create a new group.

• Show AutoDescription: Switch. Show the Auto Decription for item.

• Set external cursor: Sets the global cursor to the selected template or page. This setting is related to GPI or Automation setups.

• Clear external cursor: Clears the current global cursor.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Tree: The Tree option contains submenus for selecting, expanding, collapsing, and moving data elements.

Select All: Selects all data elements in the playlist.

Select None: Removes all selections.

Expand All: Expands all nodes in the tree, revealing the grouped data elements.

Collapse All: Collapses all nodes in the tree, hiding the grouped data elements.

Hide Empty Groups: Hides empty groups. This setting only affects the current playlist. In order to make this setting global for all playlists, enable the Store as

Default option in the playlist column context menu.

Wrap Text: Wraps all text properties of the element, adjusting the row height accordingly.

Font...: Opens the Font Chooser to set a different font for the playlist.

Show Row Lines: Switch. Select to show Row Lines.

Show Alternating Row Colors: Switch to show alternating row colors.

• Edit Filter: If using a filter, select this to display the Edit Filter menu window where you can edit a filter.

Pagelist Columns

Select the columns that should be visible in the page list. Right-click one of the existing pagelist columns, and the Page List columns context menu appears:

Choose the columns to add or remove.

Available: Shows in percent availability of the element.

Channel: Selects the playout channel the graphics will be rendered on.

Concept: show a dropdown list of the available concepts.

Description: Shows by default the text entered in the editable tab fields (or the element name, if the element is a stand-alone media file). Can be edited inline. Only a page’s Description field can be changed.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 57

Page 58

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Duration: duration of the element

Effect: Opens the Choose Effect dialog when the clicking the browse button.

Note: Transition effects cannot be used for transition logic scenes.

Layer: Shows the layer information. This can be [FRONT], [MAIN] and [BACK].

Loaded: Shows (in percent) load status of the element

Loop: Loop enables a loop mode for scenes or a full screen video clip on the video channel. Note that a full screen video clip will play once by default; however, video clips in graphics loop by default. A complete playlist (see control bar) or video clip may be looped; however, it is of course not recommended to set more than one of these modes to loop at once.

Modified: Displays the time when the element (graphic, still image, or video) was modified/created. This feature is mostly used for sorting, and note that sorting must be enabled in the page list context menu in order for this to work.

Page: Shows the page ID that usually is a numeric callup code. Can be edited inline.

Status: Shows the status of the selected page. Page status indicators are Finished,

Unfinished and None. None means: no certain page status indicated. Trio handles these pages regularly. Finished means: the page content is edited to completion and page should not be changed. Trio prohibits editing pages with this status in the page editor. Unfinished means: the page needs further editing before playout.

This is a simple "reminder" marker for a journalist to finish editing the page before playout. Also see the macro command page:

set_pagestatusVizCursiv

in the

Macro

Commands and Events section.

Template Description: Shows the template’s description. Usually information about the kind of template it is. For example lower third, bug and full screen.

Descriptions are predefined by the scene designer.

Template id: A page references a template, thus showing the template’s ID. The ID is usually a numeric callup code.

Note: Template and Page IDs are usually numeric. However, Alphanumeric

IDs can be allowed. See the General

section and enable Allow Alphanumeric

Imports.

Thumbnail: Shows a thumbnail image of the graphics. See the

Page List

section for more information on adjusting rundown and image size settings.

Variant: Shows the template variant text. To view a list of variants with thumbnails, left-click the text field.

Store as Default: Store the current selected column values as Defaults.

Use Default: Use the stored column Defaults.

Auto Fit Columns: size columns automatic.

Enable Sorting: disabled by default. The sort feature is specific per playlist, so if sorting is enabled on one playlist or show, it can still be disabled for another Playlist or show.

Change Template

For standalone scene templates it is possible

To change a template

a page is using without having to retype its content. This will work under the following conditions:

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• The tab fields in the original, and the new template, must be of the same type. If tab field 1 is of type text in the original template, the changed template must have text in tab field 1 too. The same is the case for images.

• Be aware of restrictions or differences between the two templates such as character limits. A property exposed on the source template might not be exposed in the target. As a general rule the templates should be quite similar in their logical structure.

• The total number of tab-fields should be the same.

• If the source template for instance has three bullet points (exposed as three tabfields) and the target has four, the first three will be filled with existing values and the fourth will have a default value.

• If the source template has four bullet points and the target has only three, the last bullet will not be shown. If no new text have been saved or added, it is possible to change back and the original template will be restored.

See also how To change a template using a macro command .

Create Groups

It is possible to create groups in a page list to organize pages. To create a group, right click in the page list and choose Create group. A new group appears with the default name new_group. Click on the name once to edit, or right click and choose edit/name.

To add pages to the group, drag and drop elements onto the right side of the group element. A page added to a group is added as a child node of the group when it is dropped onto the group. To move pages out of a group, drag and drop it outside the group, or use the context menu option Move Pages To Group, and select Root.

Note: Pages cannot act as groups for other pages.

An alternative option is to use the Move Pages To Group option available on the Page

List context menu. Select one or more pages in the page list, then press the right mouse button and select the Move Pages To Group option from the appearing menu.

Note: Stories imported from an Avid Newstar newsroom system will automatically appear as groups (one group per story). This is similar to a MOS playlist, and is built using the traditional show type. Hence, it has no support for context switching (concept and variants).

Copy and Paste Groups

It is possible to copy groups using the copy command (e.g. CTRL+C) and paste (e.g.

CTRL+V) in the same show. The pages within the pasted group gets new unique names.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 59

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Channel Not Found

Page 60

The channel not found dialog box opens if a channel has been set for a page (or template) that does not exist in the current profile. This occurs if a page has been configured to use a specific channel (e.g. C) and that channel has for example been deleted.

The easiest way to avoid this scenario it to always use the default assignment

[PROGRAM] as this refers to the status of the channel, and not the channel name.

Manually Sorting Pages

Disable sorting in the page list to move pages up and down by drag and drop. This possibility can for example be used for creating a sequenced playlist.

Time Codes

A time code reader is a handler that reads time-codes from some source, and prepares and executes elements by comparing the received time-codes with the begin timecodes specified on the elements. How the time-code reader receives the time-codes will vary between different time-code readers, but in most cases it will involve specific hardware for decoding time-code signals embedded in video signals.

Viz Trio supports the use of time code reader hardware. Currently a card from

Alpermann+Velte Electronic Engineering GmbH, named PCL PCI D is supported.

Contact Vizrt for instructions on how to configure Viz Trio to work with the card. The card can be used as a timing handler for a show. The card enables start times on the pages to be set. The time code from the video system will trigger the pages on-air.

Arm and Fire

With the arm & fire feature it is possible to play out two or more different elements on two different channels simultaneously. By using the commands

page:arm and

page:arm_current several elements can be cued up on their respective channel before firing them: channel A, C and D - take. The commands

page:fire and page:fire_all execute actions (take, continue, out, and so on) on all relevant channels that are armed.

page:unarm, page:unarm_all and page:unarm_current clears channels from being executed.

To read a page

1.

Select a page from the

Page List

.

2.

Double-click the page in the page list, or

3.

Right-click the Page and from the appearing context menu select Read, or

4.

Press the Read key on the Cherry Keyboard .

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Note: When reading the page it will be displayed in the preview window and opened for editing in the

Page Editor .

To take pages on-air

1.

Select a page from the

Page List

.

2.

Read the page.

3.

Click the OnAir button in the upper right corner to set Viz Trio in on-air mode.

4.

Click the Take button or the Take key on the keyboard.

5.

Click the Continue button to continue the animation if the scene has stop-points.

6.

Click the Take Out button or Take Out key on the keyboard to take the page off air.

To delete a page

1.

Select and right-click a page from the Page List , and from the appearing context

menu select Delete page, or

2.

Press the Delete key on the keyboard.

Note: It is also possible to multi-select pages by holding the SHIFT or CTRL button and selecting the range or individual pages to be deleted.

To save to XML ...

1.

From the main menu click Page > Save to XML... option.

2.

Specify the file name and location in the appearing file dialog.

3.

Click Save.

To load from XML...

1.

From the main menu click Page > Load from XML... option.

2.

Choose the pages to be imported from the list.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 61

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• Click Check All to select all pages.

• Click Uncheck All to deselect all pages.

3.

Optional: Set an Offset for the imported page numbers such that the imports do not conflict with existing page numbers.

To change a template

1.

Select the pages to change a template for (use CTRL or SHIFT to multi-select).

2.

Right-click the page(s), and from the appearing context menu select Change

template... .

3.

Enter the template name/number for the template to change to.

Note: The name of the template is case sensitive.

4.

Click OK.

To change a template using a macro command

1.

Assign the macro command page:change_template(string templateName) to a keyboard shortcut.

2.

Press the keyboard shortcut assigned to the change_template command to perform the change.

Note: The name of the template is case sensitive.

3.

Click OK.

To select a variant from the page list

• Right-click the Scene Icon column and select the variant from the appearing droplist.

To add transition effects using the page list

1.

Right-click a show’s page list column header, and from the appearing context menu select Effect and Effect Icon (last is only for visual reference)

• This will display the Effect and Effect Icon columns

2.

Click the ellipse button in the Effect column and from the appearing dialog box select a transition effect.

See Also

Creating Transition Effects

Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros

Show Properties

Transition Effects

5.11

Playlist Modes

There are three playlist modes available in Viz Trio:

Page 62 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• Viz Trio show playlists are created using the Create Playlist

button and exists only as part of the show.

• Viz Pilot

Playlists are requested by the Viz Trio operator and modified when

integrated with a Viz Pilot system. Note that a Viz Pilot playlist element cannot be edited, only the structure of the playlist. The Viz Pilot playlist elements can be added to a Viz Trio show playlist, but not a page list.

• Newsroom Playlists

are requested by the Viz Trio operator, but not modified by

default (see General user interface settings). Edits to any element in the newsroom

playlist will by default be discarded as soon as it is updated by the newsroom system. Therefore in most cases, when monitoring newsroom playlists, Viz Trio is only used to read and play out its elements.

For the playout of newsroom playlists to work, the Media Sequencer must establish a connection to Viz Gateway (see

MOS integration).

All shows and playlists are stored on the Media Sequencer for playout.

All Show Playlists can be monitored, stopped and started from the

Active Tasks

window.

This section contains information on the following topics:

To activate or deactivate a playlist

To take pages on-air from a show playlist

To show or hide columns in the playlist

To activate or deactivate a playlist

1.

Create Playlist

or open

Playlists

2.

Select Active or Inactive in the menubar for the currently selected playlist to activate or deactivate the playlist. Activating a playlist will initialize the elements and start the transfer of video clips to Viz Engine. The duration column will for videos show the duration of the video. For graphic elements or still elements the duration column will initially be empty.

To take pages on-air from a show playlist

1.

Add pages to the playlist.

Optional: Enable looping.

Optional: Set the concept for the playlist or for each element.

Optional: Set the variant for each element.

Optional: Set the duration for each element.

2.

Click the Play button to start the carousel.

3.

Click the Pause or Stop button to pause or stop the playlist.

IMPORTANT! Scenes with stop-points and out-animations are being cut as they are not automatically continued when used in a playlist.

To show or hide columns in the playlist

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 63

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• Right-click the playlist’s header and from the appearing menu select the columns to display or hide.

• The Auto width option enables automatic resize of columns within the MOS

Playlist area.

• Disable the Auto width option to manually resize the columns.

See Also

Playlists

Create Playlist

Macro Commands and Events

Macro Language

• Monitoring

Playlists

MOS

configuration

• Viz Gateway Administrator’s Guide

• Viz Pilot User’s Guide

Creating Transition Effects

5.11.1

Playlist

The control bar is used to set the concept, search, set filters, manage filters, run, pause, stop and loop the playlist. Available concepts are the same as for the show.

However, a concept set for the show does not override the playlist’s concept and conversely.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Playlist Context Menu

Playlist Columns

Playlist Filters

Page 64 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Playlist Context Menu

The Playlist’s context menu provides options to manage pages and data elements in the playlist.

Note: On composite groups containing video, only the following operations can be performed; Direct Take, Read, and Out. On standalone videos, all commands can be performed (Cue, Pause, Prepare, and so on).

Direct Take: Performs a direct take on the selected data element.

Continue: Continues the playout of an element.

Out: Takes the element out (hard cut).

Read: Reads the element, opening it in the page editor and local preview.

Pause: pause element.

Cue: Prepare the clip for playout so the first frame is ready in the player.

Cue Append: Prepare the clip for playout. The clip will start automatically when the current clip ends.

Prepare: Prepare the clip in the pending player without affecting the current clip, so it is ready to be played out. The clip will not start automatically after the current clip. Requires Viz Engine 3.3 or above.

Initialize: Initializes the selected playlist or element (loads graphics) on the external output channels. Sub menu items for Initialize:

Playlist: initialize the playlist

Element: initialize the currently selected element.

• Cut: Cut an element to the pasteboard (shortcut: Ctrl+x)

• Copy: Copy an element to the pasteboard (shortcut: Ctrl+c)

• Paste: Paste in the current pasteboard element (shortcut: Ctrl+v)

• Delete: Delete the current selected element.

Create Group: Creates a group in the playlist. Groups can be nested.

Set External Cursor: Sets the global cursor (normally related to GPI or Automation system setups) to the selected data element. This requires that the Show External

Cursor (GPI) option has been enabled in the User Interface configuration dialog, see

the Page List/Playlist and

Cursor

sections for further details.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 65

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Clear External Cursor: Clears the current global cursor.

Tree: The Tree option contains submenus for selecting, expanding, collapsing, and moving data elements in the playlist.

Select All: Selects all data elements in the playlist.

Select None: Removes all selections.

Expand All: Expands all nodes in the tree, revealing the grouped data elements.

Collapse All: Collapses all nodes in the tree, hiding the grouped data elements.

Hide Empty Groups: Hides empty groups. This setting only affects the current playlist. In order to make this setting global for all playlists, enable the Store as

Default option in the playlist column context menu.

Wrap Text: Wraps all text properties of the element, adjusting the row height accordingly.

Font...: Opens the Font Chooser to set a different font for the playlist.

Show Row Lines: Switch. Select to show Row Lines.

Show Alternating Row Colors: Switch to show alternating row colors.

Playlist Columns

Right-Click on the playlist columns-bar to select which values should be displayed:

Page 66

Available: Displays the status of external resources needed by the Viz Engine (e.g.

transferred video, and if it is available on the video playout engines). Errors are shown as tooltips. This column was previously named Progress.

Begin Time: Shows the activation start time for a group (format hh:mm:ss).

Channel: Shows which output channel an element should be sent to. Various elements can be sent to different output channels. The output channels can be set directly in the column. By default the main [PROGRAM] output channel is selected,

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide but this can be overruled by setting an alternative channel for this element only or in a template (that all data elements made from it will have). By creating a group and placing elements within it, all elements in the group will be organized by having the same channel. The Channel column is presented by default.

Concept: Shows which concept(s) the data element is associated with.

Description: Shows the description of the element. By default this will show the path of the scene (or the element name of a stand-alone media file). May be edited inline in the playlist.

Duration: Shows the length of the element. The duration is often set by Viz Pilot or a newsroom system. However, the individual elements duration can be set in Viz

Trio by editing the Duration column directly. The total duration of the elements in the playlist will be shown in the heading for the playlist. The duration of an element is the time before the next element in the list is taken.

Effect: Opens the Choose Effect dialog, which makes it possible to select a transition effect between two pages.

End Time: Shows the activation end time for a group (format hh:mm:ss).

Layer: Allows loading of graphics in separate layers on Viz Engine (front, middle, back). For example, a lower third can be shown in front of a virtual studio set or any other background, or a bug can be shown in the front layer while a lower third is shown in the middle layer. This column is presented by default.

Loaded: Shows the loaded status (in memory) of the scene and images used for a data element of that scene. Errors are shown as tooltips.

Loop: Displays a loop information column. Only a playlist or videos can be looped, not groups or individual elements in a playlist.

Mark In: Sets mark in times for video clips.

Mark Out: Sets mark out times for video clips.

Story #: Shows the story number for stories in MOS playlists. This is only supported from the ENPS newsroom system.

Template Description: Shows the template description (e.g. name).

Template Id: Shows the template ID.

Thumbnail: Shows thumbnails of the scenes.

Timecode: The timecode is an offset time on format hh:mm:ss:ff. It indicates that an element should be played out relative to the parent group or video. This is used for instance in composite groups with a video and overlay graphics that is played out on a timeline.

Variant: Select a concept’s variant from the drop-list (see the Concept column).

Store as Default: Stores the layout as the default.

Use Default: Reverts to the default layout.

Auto Fit Columns: Automatically fits all displayed columns to the given width of the playlist.

Playlist Filters

In order to narrow down the list of playlist items, it is possible to add a filter to the playlist.

This section contains information on the following topics:

To create a playlist filter

To add a playlist filter for Viz Pilot Integration

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 67

Viz Trio User’s Guide

To add a default playlist filter

To add a filter to the playlist

To create a playlist filter

1.

From the playlist menu, click the Manage filter(s) button.

2.

In the menu that opens, click New.

3.

In the Edit filter window that opens, type a descriptive name for the filter.

4.

Fill in the filter values, for example properties and conditions.

5.

Click the OK button.

The filter then becomes available in the Playlist filter list.

Note: Starting with Trio 3 composite videos behave like regular videos when filtering on a playlist.

To add a playlist filter for Viz Pilot Integration

Viz Trio can access playlists based on Viz Pilot templates as well as playlists from

Newsroom systems via Viz Gateway.

The designer of the Viz Pilot templates can categorize templates by logically dividing them into Categories and Channels. You can use the Viz Trio filters option to filter playlist views based on these categories created by the Viz Pilot template designer as illustrated in the screenshot below. In this example the playlist can be filtered as

Fullscreen or Thirds.

Page 68

To use Viz Pilot template categories as filters:

1.

Create a new filter or edit an existing for a playlist.

2.

In the add/edit filter panel set the column Property to Subcategory and the

Value column will be populated with the Categories defined by the Viz Pilot

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide template designer. You can now select values for filtering and save the filter. The playlist will be filtered according to the values selected.

To add a default playlist filter

1.

Create a playlist filter, see To create a playlist filter .

2.

Select the Use this filter as default check box in the Edit filter window.

3.

Click the OK button.

When enabling the default filter option, all playlists of that Viz Trio client will always use the selected filter. The default filter affects only one Trio client. The default filter is saved an will still be activated when restarting the Trio client.

These filters don't get deleted even if you delete the according page view. But they can be deleted manually in the filter drop down. If you create two page views with the same filter properties they share the same filter.

To add a filter to the playlist

5.12

• From the Playlist filter list, select a pre-defined filter.

Tab Fields Window

The Tab Fields window shows the tab fields for the page or template currently loaded.

Click on a tab field to display the editor for an element.

When a tab field for graphics elements is selected, a bounding box highlights the object in the preview window.

When a tab field for video elements is selected, the Search Media editor is opened. A

page containing video elements will automatically search for the video and preview it

(see the

Video Preview section).

The tab-field window has a context menu for collapsing or expanding all nodes. The

Set custom property is used to set a custom variable assigned to a tab field. For more

information on how to use custom properties, see the Tab-field Variables section.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 69

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.13

Status Bar

In the lower left corner of Viz Trio there is a status bar showing general status information and the Media Sequencer’s connection status to devices such as Viz Engine and Viz Gateway.

Examples:

The following icons can be displayed:

Profile: Shows the currently active profile.

G: Shows the Media Sequencer’s connection status to Viz Gateway. The icon implies that a newsroom system, or several, is available. If no connection is established, the symbol is not visible. A Viz Gateway connection is used to retrieve and control playout of

Create Playlist . Double-click the icon to edit the Viz Gateway connection

parameters (see the

MOS section).

Viz One: Shows the Media Sequencer’s connection status to the MAM system. The icon implies that one or more MAM systems, such as Viz One, are connected. A MAM connection is used to send shows and playlists, containing references to media such as video, to the MAM system. Double-click the icon to edit the

Proxy connection. The

indicator icon is not shown if a MAM system is not configured.

Active Tasks (0-n): Indicates the number of playlist tasks that are active for the

current profile(s). For details, see the Active Tasks section.

Database: The green cylinder shows the Media Sequencer’s connection status to the Viz Pilot database. If no connection is established, the symbol is not visible.

Messages: Shows messages to and from the system. For example error messages, commands sent to the Media Sequencer and so on. Error messages are collected in the Error log. The log can be viewed directly from the status bar by clicking the

Errors button (a small red error count label will be displayed on the button if errors occur).

Channel: Displays the channel status for all channels configured for the currently selected profile.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Active Tasks

To configure a profile

To change profile

To change channel assignment

To check memory usage

Active Tasks

Page 70 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

To open the Active Tasks window, double-click the Active Tasks icon in the

Status Bar .

The Active Tasks window displays show specific playlists that are running in active profiles. As Viz Trio is able to operate with more than one profile this status window will show if there are active tasks running in other profiles as well as different show playlists within one profile.

The Active Tasks window has the following options:

Show all profiles: Shows all profiles with Show Playlists.

Show stopped tasks: Shows all stopped tasks.

Cleanup: Removes all information about stopped tasks.

Start: Starts the selected Show Playlist.

Stop: Stops the selected Show Playlist.

Close: Closes the Active Tasks window.

To configure a profile

• Right-click the currently active profile (displayed on the statusbar) and select Profile

Configuration (see Profile Setups

).

Note: You cannot change profiles unless you have the -control

parameter set.

To change profile

• Right-click the currently active profile (displayed on the statusbar) and select a new profile from the appearing pop-up menu.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 71

Viz Trio User’s Guide

To change channel assignment

• Right-click a channel and select whether it should be assigned as a program or preview channel.

To check memory usage

• Right-click a channel and hover your mouse pointer over one of the bars to see the total system and texture memory usage (in percent as depicted above).

See Also

Configuration Interface

Show Modes

Playlist Modes

5.14

Page Editor

Page 72

The page editor is used for editing pages, and depending on the template or page edited it can display a wide range of specialized editors. Page Editing is done using a wide range of editors; For example the text, database and scroll editors. All are covered in this section.

When pages have editable elements it is possible to jump from element to element by pressing the Tab key. It is also possible to select elements by clicking on the elements in the local preview window.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

The page editor is placed in the upper right corner of the user interface and shown as the default view when starting Viz Trio.

To edit a page

The following example uses a page to edit common text properties.

1.

Double-click or Read a page from the

Page List

to open it in the page editor.

2.

Click the Kerning button, or press the

Cherry Keyboard ’s Kern key.

3.

Click the Text button to go back to text editing mode, or press the keyboard’s Text key.

4.

Click the Take button to play out the page on-air, or press the Take key on the keyboard.

5.

Click the Save or Save As button, or press the Save or Save As key on the keyboard.

Note: It is not necessary to save a page before playing it out on air; however, a template cannot be played out before it is saved as a page.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Controls

Text

Database Linking

Images

Transformation Properties

Tables

Clock

Maps

5.14.1

Controls

The main functionality of the editor window consists of the playout, script, save and transition effect buttons. In addition to the main functionality, a range of editors can be used to edit the different properties of a template or page.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Callup Code

Field Linking

Playout Buttons

Save Buttons

Script Buttons

Transition Effects

Refresh Button

Variants

To create a page

To add transition effects using the page editor

To apply a transition effect

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 73

Viz Trio User’s Guide

To select a variant from the page editor

Callup Code

The callup code field is used to save callup codes for the pages. The callup code can be set when saving a template as a page the first time, or when saving a page as a new page.

Field Linking

When working with templates (not pages), the field linkingbutton becomes available in the properties area of the

Page Editor

. Clicking the button opens a panel, where it is possible to define a feed URI and also how tabfield properties in the template are linked to properties in the external feed.

Page 74

Feed URIs can for example link to Twitter, Flickr, and so on. After the feed has been defined, a new property icon appears in the page editor:

Clicking the select values button displays a panel where it is possible to browse for items from the specified feed, which can be used as tabfield values. The list of feed items can be presented and sorted in various ways, and a filter can be added to narrow down the search.

Options in the Field-Linking panel

• Check the “Use structured content” checkbox to automatically map tabfield values to values in the VDF payload in the selected atom entry. VDF is the Viz Data Format, an ATOM-feed specification. Only check this option if the feed URI is known to be a valid VDF-formatted feed.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• Check the “Auto refresh on read” checkbox to automatically refresh all tab field values when the template is read.

See Also

Field Linking and Feed Browsing in Viz Trio

Playout Buttons

Located above the page editor are the control buttons for playout of pages.

Note: Only pages (data instances of templates) can be taken on air.

The Take button runs on-air the page that is currently displayed in the local preview, assuming that the client is set in on-air mode.

The Continue button continues the animation in the page currently loaded if it contains any stop points.

The Take Out button takes out the page that is in the preview window. If a page is in the preview window, that is not on-air, and the Take Out button is clicked, Viz Trio will take out any element that is in the same layer as the page currently displayed in the preview.

The Take + Read Next button takes the page currently read, and reads the next one in the page list.

The Cue button cues the page specified as parameter or the selected page if the parameter is empty.

The Cue append button cues the video after the currently playing video. This button is only enabled for video elements.

The Pause button pauses the video. This button is only enabled for video elements.

Save Buttons

When working with a template in the

Page Editor , the Save template and Save as

buttons are available. Clicking the Save template button saves all modifications to the template; feed linking information, feed browser layout, and default tab-field values. Clicking the Save as button creates a new page based on the template. The page’s callup code is by default set to be the highest callup code (number) in the page list + one (1). The page’s callup code is shown in the

Callup Code field. Press ENTER to

save the new page.

When working with a page in the Page Editor

, the Save page and Save as buttons are available. Clicking the Save page button saves all modifications to the page without any changes to the callup code. Clicking the Save as button creates a new page. The page’s callup code is by default set to be the highest callup code (number) in the page list + one (1). The page’s callup code is shown in the callup code field. Press ENTER to save the new page.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 75

Page 76

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Script Buttons

The Execute script button is used to execute a template’s script (see

execute_script

macro) and perform a syntax check. The show script is not executed unless the template script calls procedures or functions within the show script. For the button to work the script that is to be executed must have an OnUserClick function wrapped around it.

Sub OnUserClick ()

...

End Sub

The Edit script button opens the Script Directory . The editor by default opens the

assigned script.

Transition Effects

Creating Transition Effects is done using Viz Artist and can be applied to pages or

playlist elements to create custom transition effects from one scene to the other. If an effect is applied, the effect will be shown when the scene is taken on-air. Effects are typically wipes, dissolves, alpha fades and so on.

The Transition Path to the transition effect scenes is set in the

Show Properties window.

Refresh Button

For pages with linked tab-fields (

Field Linking ), the user may want to refresh the data

of all tab-fields in the page. A typical use case is for example weather data or financial data.

The refresh button in the Page Editor

is only enabled when at least one tab-field is linked to a feed which provides self links. Pressing the button, updates the data. While refreshing, the icon on the button changes to a cross, and pressing the button again cancels the refresh operation.

On a template level, data is automatically refreshed upon read.

Various script commands are related to the refresh procedure:

page:refresh_linked_data: Refreshes the linked data in a blocking way (useful for scripts that manipulates the refreshed data afterwards).

page:refresh_linked_data_async: Refreshes the linked data in a non-blocking way so that the GUI stays responsive.

page:cancel_refresh_linked_data: Cancels a refresh started with

page:refresh_linked_data_async.

Variants

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Template variants can be switched directly from the

Template List

and

Page List

, or

from the Page Editor

. As with concepts, variants can also be switched using a macro command in a user-defined macro or a script.

To create a page

1.

Double-click a template from the Page List

to open the template in the Page

Editor

.

2.

Edit and save it as a page with a new Callup Code

.

To add transition effects using the page editor

1.

Open a page in the Page Editor

.

2.

Click the Transition Effects button and select, from the appearing dialog box, a

transition effect.

To apply a transition effect

1.

Right-click the column headers, and from the appearing context menu select

Effect and Effect Icon (last is only for visual reference)

2.

Click the ellipse button in the Effect column and select, from the appearing dialog box select a transition effect.

To select a variant from the page editor

1.

Open the template or page in the Page Editor.

2.

Click the thumbnail images to select the variant.

See Also

Scripting

To set the transition effects path

To add transition effects using the page list

Creating Transition Effects in Viz Artist

5.14.2

Text

Text editor’s context menu

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 77

Page 78

Viz Trio User’s Guide

The text editor is the main editor for most users. Within the text editor it is possible to do a number of operations if the scene’s text editing properties are exposed, such as setting text color or adjusting the position and scale of the text.

In order to enable character formatting, the scene’s Control Text plug-in must have its

Use formatted text property enabled (On). This is done by the Viz Artist designer.

The following can be formatted if enabled:

Mode

Color

Alpha

Kerning

Position

Command

text:set_color_mode text:set_alpha_mode text:set_kerning_mode text:set_position_mode

Replace character text:show:replace_list

Rotation X, Y and Z text:set_rotate_xy_mode text:set_rotate_z_mode

Scaling text:set_scale_mode

Procedures

To edit the text color

To edit the text transparency (alpha)

To edit the text kerning

To edit the text position

To replace a word

To edit the text rotation

To edit the text scaling

The desired text manipulation mode can be assigned to a shortcut key or used in

scripts. See the User Interface section for how to assign shortcut keys. The active mode

is indicated in the lower right corner of the Page Editor’s window. The default mode is

Color editing. For more information on text commands, see the Macro Commands and

Events section.

Tip: Text commands can be used in scripts or as assigned keyboard shortcuts to switch between text manipulation modes.

If text effects are used in graphics there might, in some situations, be conflicts with editing of parameters such as scaling, alpha and position. For example; If the text effect controls the scaling of text, it is not possible to change the scaling of the fonts from the text editor. The text effect’s control over that parameter will override any changes made in Viz Trio. Text effects are Viz Artist plug-ins like TFX Color, Scale and

Rotation that are used by scene designers.

Word Replacement

The Word Replacement function allows the user to substitute a typed character with a word from a list of predefined substitution options.

The list of substitution options becomes available in the text editor when pressing

an assigned shortcut key for the text:show_replace_list command, see the Keyboard

Shortcuts and Macros section. The editor matches a typed character with the list of key

characters that are configured.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

To edit a text item

To edit the text color

To edit the text kerning

To edit the text position

To edit the text rotation

To edit the text scaling

To edit the text transparency (alpha)

To replace a word

To edit a text item

1.

Open the appropriate template or page, and select a text element in the Tab Fields or Preview window.

2.

To edit the next item, press the Tab key or select the item from the Tab Fields list or right-click the graphical elements in the Preview window.

3.

To perform character specific changes, right-click to open the text editor’s context menu, and select one of the options.

To edit the text color

1.

Open the appropriate template or page, and select a text element in the Tab Fields or Preview window.

2.

Right-click the text editor, and from the Text editor’s context menu select

Character Color.

3.

To change the color of a character or selected characters, click a color in the color palette, or hold the ALT key down while using the right and left arrow keys to switch between the available colors.

Tip: Color can also be set using the command text:set_color_mode when enabled by the designer.

See also Show Properties

on how to customize the color palette.

To edit the text kerning

1.

Right-click the text editor, and from the Text editor’s context menu select

Character Kerning.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 79

Page 80

Viz Trio User’s Guide

2.

Select one or more characters, and hold down the ALT key while using the right and left arrow keys to change the kerning, or

3.

Click the Kerning for whole text button.

4.

Click the Text editing mode button to switch back to the text editor.

Tip: Character kerning can also be set using the command text:set_kerning_mode when enabled by the designer.

Note: The Control Text plug-ins’ Expose kerning property enables the Page

Editor’s kerning button.

To edit the text position

1.

Right-click the text editor, and from the Text editor’s context menu select

Character Position.

2.

Select a character or multiple characters.

3.

Hold the ALT key down while using the arrow keys.

Tip: Position can also be set using the command text:set_position_mode when enabled by the designer.

To edit the text rotation

1.

Right-click the text editor, and from the Text editor’s context menu select

Character Rotation XY or Character Rotation Y.

2.

Select a character or multiple characters.

3.

Hold the ALT key down while using the arrow keys.

Tip: Rotation can also be set using the commands text:set_rotate_xy_mode or

text:set_rotate_z_mode when enabled by the designer.

To edit the text scaling

1.

Right-click the text editor, and from the Text editor’s context menu select

Character Scaling.

2.

Select a character or multiple characters.

3.

Hold the ALT key down while using the arrow keys.

Tip: Scaling can be also set using the command text:set_scale_mode when enabled by the designer.

To edit the text transparency (alpha)

1.

Right-click the text editor, and from the Text editor’s context menu select

Character Transparency.

2.

Select a character or multiple characters.

3.

Hold the ALT key down while using the arrow keys.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Tip: Transparency can be also set using the command text:set_alpha_mode when enabled by the designer.

To replace a word

1.

Type a character in the text editor. Make sure the cursor is placed after the character that will be replaced.

2.

Click the word replacement button or right-click the text editor and select Word

Replacer Window.

3.

Select a replacement word from the list and click OK, or press the Enter key to return to the text editor.

4.

To close the word replacement window without changes click Cancel, or press the

ESC key to quit the operation and return to the text editor.

5.14.3

Database Linking

In order to automate the way a page is filled with content, an external data source, like a database or a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, can be used to link a page’s tab field to a value, or several values, in a database or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet (see

Show

Properties and how

To create a new database connection ).

There are two variants of the database link editor. The type of editor depends on the type of control plug-ins used in the scene. Table plug-ins such as Control List and

Control Chart have their own table editor. Clicking the Database link button, shown below, opens one of the editors that can be used to link data to a page.

Database link: Opens one of the database link editors.

Save to database: Saves the updated data back to the data source.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Database Link Editor Common Properties

Database Link Editor for Scalar Linking

Database Link Editor for Table Linking

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 81

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Microsoft Excel and Unicode Support

Database Link Editor Common Properties

The Data Link editors common properties are:

Link to database: Enables the database link.

Database connection: Sets the connection to a selected database link defined in

the Show Properties ’ Databases settings.

Table: Sets the database table for the lookup.

Refresh: Refreshes the dataset.

Custom SQL: Displays by default the resulting SQL query to get the value (scalar or table) from the database. The query can be overridden to perform enhanced queries. This is mostly useful for table properties, for example to restrict the number of rows or apply a different sorting for the rows.

Apply: Applies the Custom SQL query.

Database Link Editor for Scalar Linking

Page 82

The database link editor used for text properties (scalar linking) has the following properties:

Select column: Sets the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet column, from which the text value is selected.

Key column has value: Specifies the key value to match with the lookup column, which is specified in the Databases settings (see

Show Properties ). This mechanism

selects the row of the value to use.

To restrict which rows from an Microsoft Excel spreadsheet will be inserted, a custom

SQL query can be specified in the text box at the bottom of the database link editor

(below is a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet example).

SELECT Value, Color FROM [Sheet1$] where Key > 2

Note: Setting both Column and Key determines both column and row of the scalar value for the text property.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Database Link Editor for Table Linking

The database link editor used for table linking has the following properties:

Property: The scenes table property that is linked with the column of the data source.

Column: The data source column that is linked with the property of the scene.

Note: Mapping a tab-field property with a data source immediately updates the graphics.

Microsoft Excel and Unicode Support

Viz Trio supports the use of Microsoft Excel spreadsheets to provide templates with data.

Note that Unicode characters can be used in Microsoft Excel table names and in cell values of a table, but not as column names. Supporting Unicode column names is not possible with the current implementation.

See Also

To create a new database connection

• The

VizBolddblink

macro commands for use with scripting.

5.14.4

Images

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 83

Viz Trio User’s Guide

When the page’s tab field or item is an image, the Page Editor will look like the image above. When the template contains an image you can, given that the properties are exposed, choose to load an image from file, Viz Graphic Hub, Viz Object Store or a Vizrt

MAM system.

Browse File: Opens a standard Windows file browser.

Browse Viz Artist: Opens a browser in the Page Editor for browsing images on the

Viz Engine. It is possible to sort by name and date. For convenience both sorts can be reversed and refreshed.

Browse: Opens the Search Media

pane for browsing images, video clips and person information.

Note: Additional Browse buttons will appear if other image repositories are used.

5.14.5

Transformation Properties

It is possible for scene designers to expose transformation properties for a tab field, as well as an active or inactive toggle. The following properties can be edited if enabled:

• Active

• Position

• Rotation

• Scaling

The properties are displayed as buttons on the left side of the editor:

Clicking the Position-, Rotation- or Scale button opens an editor which can be used

To set transformation properties .

To set transformation properties

Page 84 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

1.

Enter the new values with the keyboard, or

2.

Left-click the value field and drag in horizontal directions. Move between the fields using the CTRL + TAB keys.

3.

To return to the previous selection mode, click the top button.

Note: The selection mode icon varies, depending on the type of object exposed.

Others could be image, text and so on. The image above depicts a Geom.

5.14.6

Tables

If a scene contains a Control List plug-in, a table editor will be shown for that tab field when the scene is edited in Viz Trio.

The cells will have different editors depending on the data type they display. Changes made in the table editor will immediately be updated in the preview window. In addition to text fields, the table editor can show the following special editors in the table cells.

Image Cells: The drop-list shows a list of all images currently available for a specific column. This provides a quick way of choosing images when many cells are to show the same image. The browse button to the right opens the image pool.

Number Cells: Scenes with exposed numbers, with and without decimals, get a small text editor with a spin button functionality. Click the spin buttons, use the arrow keys, or enter them directly by keyboard to change the value.

Checkbox Cells: For Boolean values, such as hide and show, a checkbox will be displayed.

Table Keyboard Navigation: To move between the cells, use the arrow keys on the keyboard.

Sorting: The table can be sorted manually by clicking on the header bar of the column to sort by. Rows can be rearranged manually by drag and drop. Click on the row once and hold the mouse button to drag and drop it to its new location.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 85

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Customizing a Table View: By right-clicking on the table header bar, a context menu appears. Columns can be hidden or shown by selecting or unselecting the column. The table editor context menu contains the following columns:

#: Shows the row number (#)

Description: Shows the description field. Descriptions can only be edited in Viz

Artist by the designer.

Auto Width: When disabled the column width can be set manually.

Enable Sorting: Enables manual sorting of the table.

Clear Sorting: Clears any sorting and take the table back to its initial state

Insert Row (Ins): Inserts a single row.

Insert N Rows ...: Opens a small input dialog for multiple row insert. The number of rows allowed to add are limited by the scene design.

Page 86

Edit Row: Edit the row data.

Delete Selected Rows (DEL): Deletes selected rows. For multiple select use

CTRL + Left mouse key or SHIFT + Arrow keys up or down.

Select All (CTRL+A): Selects all rows.

Cut (CTRL+X): Cuts rows out of the table. Press CTRL+V to re-add the row(s).

Copy (CTRL+C): Copies rows from the table. Press CTRL+V to add the new row(s).

Paste (CTRL+V): Adds the cut or copied rows to the table.

Save Settings: Saves the column setting for an active template.

Note: The number of rows that can be inserted or deleted depends on the configuration of the plug-in. See the Chart and List plug-ins in the Viz Artist

User’s Guide.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Populating Tables Using Macro Commands

By using Viz Trio’s macro language, a table can be populated with data through a script, or through an external application that connects via a socket connection. To populate a table, the macro table:set_cell_value is used. The macro takes 4 arguments:

• The field identifiers for the table (string) and the column (string), the table’s row number (integer: starts at 0), and the data to be inserted.

• The example shown below will insert the text string test, in row 4, in the column with id 1, in the table with id 1.

table:set_cell_value 1 1 3 test

5.14.7

Clock

If the template contains a clock object that is made editable with the Control Clock plug-in, a clock editor opens when tabbing to the clock’s tab field.

The clock editor has two main functions:

1.

Normal editor: Specify what should happen when the page is taken on-air.

2.

Live Control: With a page on-air, a clocks counting can be started, stopped, continued, frozen, or unfrozen.

The clock editor’s properties are:

Start At: Sets the starting time for the clock.

Stop At: If enabled, a stop time for the clock can be set in the template.

Up/Down: If enabled, the direction the clock should run can be chosen in the template.

Action: Select what the clock is to do when the page is taken on-air. Either:

None: The time is just set and the clock must be started with the Live Control

Start button.

Set and start: The time is set and the clock is started.

Set and stop: The time is set and the clock is stopped.

Stop: The clock is stopped when the page is taken on-air. This can be used to create a shortcut that stops the clock. Just create a page that stops the clock and link it to a key shortcut.

Continue: Similar use as with stop.

• Freeze: The clock is frozen when the page is taken on-air.

• Unfreeze: The clock is unfrozen when the page is taken on-air.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 87

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.14.8

Maps

There are two versions of the Viz World Client available to Viz Trio. A simplified version and a full version. The simplified version is enabled in the configuration window,

see General

settings under the

User Interface

section. The full version launches the selected Map client, either in Classic Edition or the new Second Edition (SE).

Select the prefered Map client in File > Configuration > General > Viz World Maps

Editor:

Note: Make sure that the Viz Maps Client is installed on the Trio client and make sure that the Viz Engines (both local preview and On-Air render Engines) connect to the same Viz World Server. To configure the Viz World Server address in Viz

Engine go to Config > Maps on the Viz Engine server.

Edit Map: If the map’s tab-field property has more than one property exposed, clicking this button will open the corresponding editors (for example text and text kerning).

Browse Viz World: Opens the full version of the Viz World Client. To use the full version, disable the small version. You can also click the Select Map button to launch the selected Map client.

Maps Classic Client

Page 88 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Maps Second Edition Client

Maps Lite Edition (inline)

Control World plugin interface

In addition to the Viz World Client editor, Viz World also provides an easy to use control interface when using the Control World plugin. The control is a replacement for the

Control Map plugin with much more options and on-the-fly feedback from Viz.

Note: The two controls are not compatible. The new control will not work with Viz

Pilot, and is only a part of Viz 3.3 and later.

The control can expose different fields based on the container it resides on. When tabbing to the control (in a navigator scene) the camera will jump to the map location and all feedback (exact camera position) will be immediate.

Longitude Offset: Sets the longitude offset.

Latitude Offset: Sets the latitude offset.

Distance: Sets the distance.

Distance Offset (%): Sets the distance offset in percentage.

Pan: Sets the pan.

Tilt: Sets the tilt.

Hop Duration: Sets the hop duration.

Terrain Height Scale Mode: Sets the scale mode of the terrain height.

Terrain Height Scale: Sets the scale of the terrain height.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 89

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Select Map (button): Opens the Viz World Editor. If the control is configured to use the simple Viz World Editor, Viz Trio must be configured to do the same.

See Also

General settings for switching to simple Viz World Editor

• Viz Artist User’s Guide for information on Control World

• Viz World Client and Server User’s Guide

5.15

Create New Scroll

Creating a scroll allows the user in an easy way to create credit lists or any other scroll, either vertical, horizontal, with ease points and so on. When creating a scroll from scratch Viz Trio automatically creates a scroll scene on Viz which the user can redesign.

Note: New scrolls must be created using the scroll function.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Create New Scroll Editor

Scroll Elements Editor

Scroll Configuration

Scroll Live Controls

Scroll Control

Element Spacing

Easepoint Editor

Working with Scrolls

5.15.1

Create New Scroll Editor

Page 90

• Template Name: Enter a name for the template.

• Scene Directory: Specify the path to a scene in which to save the template, or select a show by pressing the Browse button.

• Template description: Enter a description for the template.

• Scroll Area Width: Sets the width of the scroll area.

• Scroll Area Height: Sets the height of the scroll area.

• Show Scroll Area: Enable this option to show the scroll area in the preview window.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• Save Template: Saves the template in the specified scene directory.

The Scroll Elements editor opens automatically when saving or opening an already saved scroll template. A scroll is created by compiling a set of templates or pages.

5.15.2

Scroll Elements Editor

Right-click on any element in the scroll list and a menu appears where actions can be performed and parameter settings defined.

The different options in the Scroll list context menu are:

Duplicate Element: Makes a copy of the selected scroll element and adds it to the scroll list.

Remove: Removes the selected element from the scroll list.

Remove All: Removes all elements from the scroll list.

Reload Templates: Reloads the original templates.

Reload Page Data: Reloads the original page data of the selected scroll element.

Reload All Page Data: Reloads the original page data of all the elements in the scroll list.

Adjust Spacing: Opens the Element Spacing

editor which allows the user to adjust the distance before and/or after the selected scroll element.

Add Easepoint: Opens the

Easepoint Editor which allows the user to add an

easepoint to the selected scroll element.

Edit Easepoint: Opens the Easepoint Editor to adjust the easepoint settings of the

selected scroll element.

Remove Easepoint: Removes the ease point from the selected scroll element.

• Export Pages To File: Exports all scroll elements in the currently selected scroll to an

XML-file.

• Import Pages From File: Imports a set of scroll elements from an XML-file to the scroll. Note that this option will erase the scroll elements currently in the scroll.

Insert Range of Pages: This option allows the user to insert one or more pages in the scroll. Specify the range of pages to be inserted in the appearing dialog.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 91

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.15.3

Scroll Configuration

Clicking the Scroll Config button opens the scroll main property page.

Direction: Sets the direction of the scroll.

Spacing: Adjusts the distance between the pages in the scroll.

Alignment: Aligns the elements of the scroller to each other. The bounding box of the elements is used for aligning the objects.

Speed: Sets the speed of the scroll.

• Total Time: Shows the total scroll time in seconds.

Start Offset: Set an offset position from where the scroll should start.

Loop: If enabled, the scroll elements will be looped.

Auto-start on take: If enabled, the scroll will start automatically on take.

Lock Total Time: Lock the total time the scroll is running. This option distributes the time evenly for all pages. Pages with more or less content are not taken into account. See the

Scroll Elements Editor

section for how to add and edit ease points.

5.15.4

Scroll Live Controls

Clicking the Scroll Live Controls button, opens the Scroll Live Controls sub page, which controls the start, stop, and continue actions of a scroll on-air.

Page 92

To activate the Scroll Live Controls, first click the Take button in the Scroll Editor. When active, the Live Control buttons will be green and can be used as follows:

Start: Takes and starts the scroll that is currently displayed in the local preview onair, assuming that the client is set in on-air mode.

Stop: Stops the scroll.

Continue: Resumes the scroll.

Speed: Adjusts the speed of the scroll while on-air.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.15.5

Scroll Control

The Start, Stop and Continue buttons in the lower left corner of the Scroll Elements editor enables a preview of the scroll in the local preview renderer window.

Start: Starts the current scroll in the local preview window.

Stop: Stops the scroll.

Cont: Resumes the scroll.

Position: Use the Position slider to manually run a preview of the scroll. Click the value field, keep the button pressed and move the mouse horizontally. The cursor will change to an arrow to indicate that the position value can be changed.

The Scroll Elements editor has two sub-pages, Scroll Configuration and Scroll Live

Controls

. Set parameters for the scroll using the

Scroll Configuration

editor, and control

the scroll while on-air through the Scroll Live Controls

editor.

5.15.6

Element Spacing

Open the adjust element spacing editor to adjust the distance before and/or after a single scroll element:

The Adjust Spacing editor’s properties are:

• Extra spacing before element: Sets the extra distance before the element.

• Extra spacing after element: Adjusts the extra distance after the element.

5.15.7

Easepoint Editor

The Easepoint editor allows for ease point parameters to be set for a scroll element.

The Easepoint editor’s properties are:

• Slow down length (EaseOut): Specifies the slow down length of an ease point.

• Speed up length (EaseIn): Sets the speed-up length of an ease point.

• Continue Automatically: When enabled, the scroll continues automatically after the specified pause-time.

• Pause Time in Seconds: Sets the pause-time in seconds.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 93

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• Element Alignment (%): Aligns the bounding box of an element relative to the position of an ease point.

• The default element alignment is 50%, which aligns the center point of the element’s bounding box with the ease point.

• When creating rolls, selecting an element alignment of 0% aligns the bottom of the element’s bounding box with the ease point, while 100% adjusts the bounding box’s top with the ease point.

• When creating crawls, an element of 0% aligns the left side of the bounding box with the ease point, while 100% adjusts the bounding box’s right side to the ease point.

• Scroll Area Alignment (%): Adjusts the position of an ease point relative to the screen’s center point. Scroll area alignment is defined in percentage of the scroll area.

• The default scroll area alignment is 50%, which aligns the ease point with the center point of the screen.

• For rolls a scroll area alignment of 0%, aligns the ease point with the scroll area’s lower side, while 100% adjusts it to the upper side.

• For crawls, a scroll area alignment of 0% corresponds with the scroll area’s left side, while 100% aligns it at the right side.

• When in ease point edit mode, the current position of the ease point is indicated by a line in the local preview window.

Rename Easepoint: Click the button to rename the ease point. Enter the new name in the appearing dialog.

5.15.8

Working with Scrolls

This section contains information on the following topics:

To create a scroll

To configure the scroll

To edit a scroll element

To copy an element in the scroll elements list

To test a scroll

To create a scroll

Page 94

1.

Select Create New Scroll from the editor’s drop-list menu.

2.

Enter a Template Name.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

3.

Select a Scene Directory.

4.

Enter a Template description.

5.

Set the Scroll Area Width and Height.

6.

Check the Show Scroll Area to show the scroll area in the preview window.

7.

Drag and drop templates and/or pages into the

Scroll Elements Editor .

Note: Different templates for different scroll elements are needed, so the graphics designer should create templates to fill the need for scroll elements.

To configure the scroll

1.

Click the Scroll Configuration button to adjust the scroll’s parameters for layout

and animation speed.

2.

Adjust spacing before and/or after a single scroll element using the

Element

Spacing editor.

3.

Add and configure easepoints using the

Easepoint Editor

editor.

4.

Click Save (CTRL+S) to save the scroll.

To edit a scroll element

1.

Double-click a scroll element in the

Scroll Elements Editor list to open the

element’s editor.

2.

Click the Read Parent Page (arrow) button to switch back to the Scroll Elements

Editor

.

To copy an element in the scroll elements list

1.

Right-click the list of scroll elements, and select Duplicate Element from the appearing context menu, or

2.

Drag and drop an element into the scroll list while pressing the CTRL button.

To test a scroll

• Click the Scroll Control

buttons in the lower left corner of the scroll, or scrub the

Position value with the mouse or arrow keys on the keyboard.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 95

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.16

Edit Show Script

Select Edit Show Script from the

Page Editor drop-down menu. This will open the

Choose Show Script window, where it is possible to edit the script assigned to the show.

Tip: The Choose Show Script window can also be opened by selecting Script >

Edit Show Script from the Template List context menu, or by clicking the Show

Script browse button in the Show Properties

window.

See Also

To assign a script to a show

5.17

Snapshot

Select Snapshot from the

Page Editor drop-down menu. This opens a window that

enables a snapshot of the current view on the on-air renderer to be taken.

Specify the channel to take a snapshot from, and select the preferred format. Browse the Image database to select the folder where the snapshot is to be placed. The images can be sorted by Name or Date. Select the Reverse check-box to reverse the sorting. To refresh the content of the selected folder, click the Refresh button.

Then enter a name for the image and press the Take Snapshot button to the right.

A thumbnail of the snapshot will then be visible, and the snapshot is shown in the preview window.

Note: Snapshots can only be deleted from Viz Artist.

Page 96 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.18

Render Videoclip

The Render Videoclip option from the drop down menu exposes an editor for post rendering of pages to a device specified in Viz Artist, such as an AVI or a tape recorder.

Post rendering is used to create images or video files of graphical scenes. The files can be used for playout on Viz Engine. Selecting a video plug-in will create one file; however, selecting an image plug-in will render an image according to the configured frame rate. For example; Rendering a scene for five seconds will result in 250 images if the frame rate is 25 frames per second (fps).

Rendered data elements can be full screen graphics or graphics with Alpha values such as lower thirds and over the shoulder graphics.

The Viz 2.x render devices must be activated and set up in Viz Config. The render devices for Viz 3.x are automatically setup and do not need any configuration.

Note: Only scene-based pages can be post rendered.

The settings in the post render frame is continued throughout Viz Trio client restarts.

Host name: Sets the Viz machine that will post render the scene. It is also possible to define the port number (

<host-name>:<port-number>).

Plugin: Sets the renderer device.

Format: Sets the format. Available options are full frame, fields top, fields bottom, full frame/interlaced top, full frame/interlaced bottom and full frame skip. The options vary depending on the Plugin selected.

Codec: Sets the codec to be used.

FPS: Sets frame per second. Available options are 30, 60, 29.97 and 59.94.

Output path: Sets the output path. A corresponding browse button is available when localhost is selected as host. As Viz Trio cannot browse the file system on other machines, manually make sure that the output path is valid if defining the path on anouther machine. A full or relative path can be added. If no path is given, the file is stored in the Viz program folder on the rendering machine.

From: Sets the start time in seconds.

To: Sets the end time in seconds.

RGB: Sets the pixel format to RGB.

RGBA: Sets the pixel format to RGBA which includes the alpha channel (blending/ transparency).

Record button (circle): Starts the rendering process.

Stop button (square): Stops the rendering process before the configured stop time.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 97

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.19

Search Media

To open the Search Media editor, select Search Media from the top right drop-down menu. The Search Media editor allows you to search the connected Viz Object Store database and MAM system for images and video clips. Viz Object Store traditionally stores still images and person information. The Vizrt MAM system Viz One traditionally stores video, audio and video stills. The Search Media feature combines all the sources into one.

Note: Viz Trio does not support the use of audio files.

Media items can be dragged and dropped into a show, show playlist, playlist, template or page (e.g. as full screen or part of the graphics). Double-clicking an image or video clip in any of the aforementioned scenarios will open the Search Media editor.

Page 98

The left pane shows the Search and Filter Options

and a list of categories, while the right pane displays the search result.

Tip: The number of fetched media files can be specified in the

General

section of the Trio Configuration. Scrolling down to the bottom of the list will fetch addtional media files.

When the media search frame is shown and you have many hits only the first N hits are shown. When scrolling down in the result list the next N hits will be fetched. There is no more button. The next chunk of hits get automatically searched when scrolling down to the bottom.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Media Context Menu

Search and Filter Options

Ordering metadata fields for Video and Images

Media Context Menu

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Sort By: Displays a sub menu with sort options.

Name/Name (Descending): Sorts by name in ascending and descending order.

Registration Date / Registration Date (Descending): Sorts by registration date in ascending and descending order.

Show Extra Metadata: Switches the media icons to display meta data such as complete filename, creation date, and clip length and so on.

Launch Viz PreCut: Opens the selected video clip(s) in Viz PreCut for editing.

Launch Viz EasyCut: Opens the selected video clip(s) in Viz EasyCut for editing.

Edit Metadata: Enables the user to edit the meta data for the selected clip (in Viz

One).

Preview: Previews images using the Windows Picture and Fax Viewer. Is only available for Viz Object Store items.

Search and Filter Options

Search field: Combo box for entering a search criterion. Previously entered search criteria are remembered per session.

Filter: Enables/disables the image or video filters.

From/To: Filters the search result based on From and To registration dates.

Keywords: Filters the search result based on keywords.

Note: Viz Trio does not support the use of audio files.

Ordering metadata fields for Video and Images

Fields in the meta data view of a video or an image can be dragged and dropped to change the order. Typically this is used to see important fields on the top of the list.

See Also

Picture Database Settings

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 99

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Viz One Configuration

5.20

Import Scenes

From the drop-down menu select Import Scenes. This menu item opens a browser window where Viz Artist scenes can be selected and enabled for Viz Trio.

Choose the scene, or scenes, to import into the template list and click the Import button. It is possible to multi-select scenes and import scenes from any scene folder.

To make the scenes ready for playout as fast as possible, press the Import and Initialize button. This will load all scenes on the program and preview renderer (Viz Engine).

The scenes can be sorted by Name or Date. Select the Reverse check-box to reverse the sorting. To refresh the content of the selected folder, click the Refresh button.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Import recursively

Import scenes with Toggle or Scroller Plugin

Import recursively

Page 100

Another import option is to import a whole folder, or folder tree structure. This option is a recursive import, and it does not initialize the show on the renderers.

To import recursively, right-click the folder in the scene tree and select Import

Recursively on the context menu.

Caution: A scene with the same name as an existing template in the current show will be attempted to be merged with the existing template (e.g. scene 1000 with template 1000).

Import scenes with Toggle or Scroller Plugin

When importing a scene with a Toggle or Scroller plugin, in combination with

Control Object, you will be given a choice to import that scene or not. Under normal circumstances you will not import scenes with Toogle or Scroller plugin, but in those cases where you are using Toggle or Scroller plugin in scenes that are not Transition

Logic or ticker related you will have the option of importing them as templates.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.21

Graphics Preview

Real-time rendered graphics and video

The local Preview window shows a WYSIWIG (what you see is what you get) representation of the graphics and video. In addition it will show the defined title and safe area and the bounding boxes. Bounding boxes are related to the graphics scene’s editable elements (see the

Tab Fields Window section). For the full screen video preview

there is also a timeline for scrubbing of full screen videos.

Floating or moving the Preview Window

The “pin” button at the upper right menu-bar in in the preview windows, close to the green connection-status message, allows you to undock the preview window. This allows you to freely move the preview window, perhaps to another attached monitor.

• If the preview window is docked (i.e. attached) to the Trio main window, clicking the pin-button will detach the Preview window.

• If the preview-window is detached from the main Trio window, clicking the pinbutton will attach (i.e. connect) the preview window to the main Trio window.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Graphics Control Buttons

Connection Status

Video Control Buttons

5.21.1

Graphics Control Buttons

Above the Preview window is a button bar with some buttons and a timeline display:

The Play button starts the scene animation currently loaded in the local preview.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 101

Viz Trio User’s Guide

The Continue button continues the scene animation currently loaded if it contains any stop points.

The Stop button stops the scene animation.

With the Time slider it is possible to scrub the timeline manually by clicking in the value field, keeping the button pressed and moving the mouse horizontally back and forth.

The cursor will change to an arrow to indicate that the time value can be changed.

Click this button to show or hide the Title Area in the Preview window.

Click this button to show or hide the Safe Area in the Preview window.

Click this button to show or hide the Bounding Box for the tab field currently selected in the Preview window.

Preview modes RGB, Key and RGB with background image.

The three buttons can be used to see the previewed graphics in three different modes.

• The first shows the graphics in an RGB mode with a default background color

(black).

• The next shows the graphics in Key mode, showing how the key signal looks like.

• The last option provides an example of an RGB preview with a background image.

This will illustrate how the graphics appear on top of a video.

• For example:

See Also

Show Properties

and how to set the Preview background image

5.21.2

Connection Status

Page 102 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

In the upper right corner of the Preview window, the connection status of the local Viz renderer can be seen. Clicking the adjacent arrow button will display a context menu.

These functions are mainly for test and debug purposes. The context menu can show 3 or 5 menu choices as explained below:

• Show Commands: Opens the command shell for the local Viz Engine renderer.

• Show Status: Shows a status box for the local Viz Engine renderer.

• Restart Viz: Restarts the local Viz Engine running on the same computer as the Trio client. This menu-item is only active for local preview.

If Trio has been started with an external Viz Previewer, and only then, two additional menu choices will be shown in the context menu:

Set OnAir: Sets the external Viz Engine in OnAir Mode, meaning that it for instance exits the Design Mode of Vis Artist and starts acting as a renderer engine.

Reconnect Viz: Reconnects to the external Viz Engine. It is only the local Trio client that reconnects to the remote viz engine.

Note: External Viz Previewer in this context should not be confused with the

External Viz Preview settings in the profile. An External Viz Previewer is another way of making an external Viz Engine act as a local Viz preview. You can configure it with the Viz Trio startup parameter -vizpreview [your-vizpreview-hostname-

here].

5.22

Video Preview

The local preview window can also show, in addition to the

Graphics Preview

, the compressed version of full screen video clips. Full screen video clips are added directly to the show or playlist.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Video Control Buttons

See Also

Graphics Control Buttons

5.22.1

Video Control Buttons

Above the full screen video clip preview window is a button bar with some buttons and a timeline display:

The Play button starts the video clip currently loaded in local preview. Press the Play button to start the clip. Press it again and it will stop. If a Mark in point has been set it will jump back to the Mark in point. When loading the clip in Preview it will play the clip automatically.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 103

Viz Trio User’s Guide

The Pause button pause the video clip currently loaded in local preview. Press the

Pause button to freeze the clip. Press it again to continue playing the clip.

The Stop button stops and rewinds the video clip currently loaded in local preview. If a

Mark in point has been set it will jump back to the Mark in point.

The Timeline has a marker and the possibility to set Mark in and out points. It also shows the actual length of the clip in hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.

If a Mark in and out point has been set, the length of the clip will show the time of the clip marked by the in and out points.

Use the Mark in and out points to create new time code references for Viz Engine. Save the video clip and Viz Engine will only play out the frames between the Mark in and out points. Use Save As to create new and edited versions of the original clip.

Note: Mark in and out only creates references for Viz Engine; hence, it does not create new clips that are saved back to the MAM system. New clips are made using Viz EasyCut or Viz PreCut. For Viz Trio users this is limited to Viz PreCut.

See Also

Graphics Control Buttons

Search Media

5.23

TimeCode Monitor

The TimeCode Monitor ( TC Monitor ) shows the progress of the current video clip on a

certain channel.

TC Monitor

Page 104

For a Trio operator, it is important to monitor the progress of a playing video clip. The indication that a video clip is nearing it’s end is especially important.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

In addition to the basic

TC Monitor

that opens in a separate window, an inline TimeCode

Monitor becomes available above the local Preview panel in Viz Trio whenever playing a video.

Note: The TimeCode Monitor keeps track of the time code and the video server channels; hence, it will only work if the system is configured to be integrated with a video server. Also, in order to monitor video clips embedded in graphics, the render engine must also be defined as a video channel (see the

Output section).

This section contains information on the following topics:

TimeCode Monitor Options

To enable the TimeCode Monitor

To disable the TimeCode Monitor

To monitor the time code of a video

TimeCode Monitor Options

The TimeCode Monitor displays three columns: Channel, Status and Armed.

Channel: Name of the Channel. Video channels appear as light grey rows, with progress information in the Status column. Non-video channels are shown as dark grey rows without status.

Status: The name of the current item, followed by any cued item, is displayed above the progress bar. Current Location time and Remaining time are shown below the progress bar. The progress bar changes color to indicate status:

Green: Video playing

Red: Video playing, less than 10 seconds remaining

Blue: Video finished

Armed: Displays the armed state of an element on a channel. See Arm and Fire .

The rows in the list can be shown or hidden using the context menu on each item:

Hide: Hide the selected channel

Show All: Show all channels

At the bottom of the window is the zoom function to adjust the display size, and the

Profile selector which displays the current profile name, and allows selection of other profiles.

The Timecode Monitor opens in full screen by default. Press the ESC key to exit full screen mode.

To enable the TimeCode Monitor

• To activate the TimeCode Monitor, go to Configuration -> Keyboard Shortcuts and use the command gui: show_timecode_monitor

When activated, the time code status will be shown in the TC Monitor

whenever a video is played.

To disable the TimeCode Monitor

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 105

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• To disable the TimeCode Monitor, use the command gui: hide_timecode_monitor

To monitor the time code of a video

1.

Make sure that the TimeCode Monitor is activated, see

To enable the TimeCode

Monitor .

2.

Double-click a video or composite element (graphics and video combined).

3.

Play the video.

The progress of the video should be displayed in both the TC Monitor, and the inline TC

Monitor above the local Preview panel.

See Also

Macro Language

Macro Commands and Events

5.24

Field Linking and Feed Browsing in Viz Trio

Viz Trio supports browsing tab-field values from external sources. Instead of editing tabfield values manually, values from an external feed can be selected.

Note: Viz Trio only supports the Atom 1.0 feed standard.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Workflow

Overview

Technical

Field Linking

Feed Browsing

5.24.1

Workflow

1.

Import a regular scene as template in Trio.

2.

Read the template.

3.

On top of each tab-field of the template, a link button opens the collection picker, which lets the user specify a feed URI. Additionally the user has to specify which part of the selected feed item should be used as value; title, content, a link with a certain link relation, entry or locator.

Note: The link button is not available for pages. Linking to an Atom feed is the property of a template in Viz Trio and is therefore shared by all pages using that template.

4.

Press the Save template button.

5.

When establishing a valid feed connection, the tab-field value can be selected from the feed items.

Page 106 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.24.2

Overview

Feed URIs can be defined in the control object of the scene design in Viz Artist.

Additionally, the feed URI for a tab-field in a template can be defined from within Viz

Trio. Each page then uses the feed browser to edit the tab-field value. The specified feed URI in Viz Trio overwrites any existing feed URI from the control object. A reimport of the scene does not reset the specified feed URI by the field definition specified in control object.

A tab-field in general has several properties. Each property relates to a control plug-in in the scene. Properties are grouped under a tab-field by a naming convention.

Example: The ControlText plug-ins specifying the field identifiers 1.name, 1.score

and 1.image will form a tab-field 1 with the properties name, score and image.

Selecting a feed item for the tab-field 1 should apply the parts of the selected item to the properties name, score and image at once. The individual property values should be editable as usual. The feed item selection works a pure fill-in help.

The feed linking is usable across all tab-field types.

Note: Make sure to define matching object types; a thumbnail link for control image tab-fields, and so on.

Field linking in Viz Trio is a two-step procedure:

1.

Field Linking: Linking the fields in a template to various parts of data that comes from entries in a feed. This is a setup step that is usually done once for a template.

2.

Feed Browsing: After field linking has been set up and saved for a template, a new property editor for selecting an entry from a feed will be available. This feed browser lets you select an item in a feed that contains the values that should be applied to the field values.

Note: Viz Trio only supports the Atom 1.0 feed standard.

The feed browser supports two types of feeds:

• Flat feeds

• Hierarchical feeds (folder structure)

Tabfield Grouping

To be able to set multiple tabfield values from the same feed entry, the tabfields must be grouped together. This is done by giving them the same prefix followed by the period character. For example, the following tabfield names will generate two groups of tabfields (

candidate1 and candidate2): candidate1.name

candidate1.image

candidate2.name

candidate2.image

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 107

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.24.3

Technical

The following

XML Namespace Prefixes are used when referring to XML elements:

XML Namespace Prefixes

Prefix

atom viz vaext media thr opensearch

URL

http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom http://www.vizrt.com/types http://www.vizrt.com/atom-ext http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/ http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0

http://a9.com/-/spec/opensearch/1.1/

Example: The notation

<atom:entry> is to be interpreted as referring to the same element as

<entry xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom">.

The keywords MUST, MUST NOT, REQUIRED, SHALL, SHALL NOT, SHOULD, SHOULD

NOT, RECOMMENDED, MAY, and OPTIONAL in this document are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119.

5.24.4

Field Linking

Field linking is the process of linking the fields in a template to various parts of data that comes from entries in a feed.

Page 108

This section contains information on the following topics:

The Following Fields can be Linked

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

The Following Fields cannot be Linked

Elements in atom feed

Elements in atom entry

The Following Fields can be Linked

<atom:author>

The personal details of the author of the selected

<atom:entry>, which might be an individual person or an organization. The data is provided in child elements as follows:

<atom:name>: The name of the author. The value of the <atom:name> element inside the first

<atom:author> element that applies for the entry is recorded as the field value. This child element is required if you are specifying the

<atom:author> element.

<atom:uri>: A URL associated with the author, such as a blog site or a company web site. The value of the

<atom:uri> element inside the first <atom:author> element that applies for the entry is recorded as the field value. This child element is optional.

<atom:email>: The e-mail address of the author. The value of the <atom:email> element inside the first

<atom:author> element that applies for the entry is recorded as the field value. This child element is optional.

<atom:content>

• Both inline and URL content is supported.

• There is no type match, so it is up to the Trio operator to figure out what content can be used.

• For URL content the resource is downloaded first and then applied as the value. If you just want the URL you should use

<atom:link>.

<atom:entry>

The whole entry XML.

<atom:link>

This element defines a reference from an entry to a Web resource; in other words this is the value of the

href attribute.

<vaext:locator>

The text of the Vizrt Atom Extension

<vaext:locator> element which has a

vaext:type attribute equal to the mediatype attribute of <viz:fielddef> element in the model.

<atom:published>

This element is a Date construct indicating the initial creation or first availability of the entry. The value of the

<atom:published> element in the entry is recorded as the field value.

<atom:summary>

This element is a Text construct that conveys a short summary, abstract, or excerpt of an entry. The content of the

<atom:summary> element in the entry is recorded as the field value.

<atom:thumbnail>

• The value of the url attribute of the first thumbnail element in the entry is recorded as the field value.

<atom:title>

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 109

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 110

This element is a Text construct that conveys a human-readable title for an entry or feed; the title of the selected

<atom:entry>.

<atom:updated>

This element is a Date construct indicating the most recent instant in time when the selected

<atom:entry> was modified. The value of the <atom:updated> element in the entry is recorded as the field value.

The Following Fields cannot be Linked

<atom:category>

<atom:id>

<atom:rights>

• Any other elements.

Elements in atom feed

Elements that should be present in the

<atom:feed> for the full user experience:

OpenSearch link:

<atom:link rel="search" type="application/opensearchdescription+xml"

href="http://example.com/opensearchdescription.xml"/>

• Optional, needed for support for server side searching.

• The opensearchdescription xml file must contain a template node that returns search results as an atom feed:

<opensearch:Url type="application/atom+xml" template="http://..." />

• See http://www.opensearch.org/Specifications/OpenSearch/1.1 for more details.

Up link:

<atom:link rel="up" type="application/atom+xml;type=feed"

href="http://..." />

• Optional, needed for nested collections.

• The up link should link to the parent folder feed for hierarchical feeds.

• The up link must have a type string equal to

"application/atom

+xml;type=feed".

Elements in atom entry

Elements that should be present in the

<atom:entry> for the full user experience:

Self link:

<atom:link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml;type=entry"

href="http://..." />

• The self link must link to the url that will return the

<atom:entry> xml.

• The self link must have a type value equal to

"application/atom

+xml;type=entry".

• Needed for refresh/update of values from the item to work.

• Needed in combination with the up link for remembering and showing the selected feed entry in a hierarchy of feeds (folder structure). Not needed for remembering selection in flat feeds since then the

atom:id will be used.

Up link:

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

<atom:link rel="up" type="application/atom+xml;type=feed"

href="http://..." />

• The up link must have a href value that is the url of the feed the entry is in.

• The up link must have a type value equal to

"application/atom

+xml;type=feed".

• Needed in combination with the self link for remembering and showing the selected feed entry in a folder structure.

Down link:

<atom:link rel="down" type="application/atom+xml;type=feed"

href="http://..." />

• Needed if this

<atom:entry> is to be considered a subfolder instead of a normal

<atom:entry>.

• The down link must have a type value equal to

"application/atom

+xml;type=feed".

• The down link must have a

href value that is the url of the feed (folder) the entry represents.

• Link may contain

thr:count attribute (RFC4685) indicating how many children there are. If the value of

thr:count is 0 (zero) then the folder will not be loaded since it is empty. This is an optimization.

Thumbnail link:

<media:thumbnail url="http://..."/>

• Needed for thumbnail icons to display on the entries in the feed browser.

• The URL value must reference a JPEG or PNG image resource.

• If many thumbnails are defined the first one will be selected as the default. This is according to Media RSS Specification Version 1.5.0.

Locator

<vaext:locator type="application/vnd.vizrt.viz.geom">GEOM*Vizrt/

Tutorials/VizTrio/...</vaext:locator>

• Needed to be able to link a tabfield to a locator. A locator is a path that is not representable with the URI

href in an <atom:link>. The selected value is the text node in the locator, so it can in theory be used for any kind of text.

• For Viz Trio it is meant to be used to select paths to resources that are not URIs, like the resources on the Viz Graphics Hub that is currently in use.

• The

type must match the tabfield type.

• The value from the first locator that matches will be used.

• If no locators matches an error message will be logged in Trio.

• The Viz Engine types are:

• TEXT :

text/plain

• RICHTEXT:

application/vnd.vizrt.viz.richtext+xml

• MATERIAL :

application/vnd.vizrt.viz.material

• DUPLET :

application/vnd.vizrt.viz.duplet

• TRIPLET :

application/vnd.vizrt.viz.triplet

• FONT :

application/vnd.vizrt.viz.font

• CLOCK :

application/vnd.vizrt.viz.clockcommands

• GEOM :

application/vnd.vizrt.viz.geom

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 111

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• IMAGE :

application/vnd.vizrt.viz.image

• AUDIO :

application/vnd.vizrt.viz.audio

• VIDEO :

application/vnd.vizrt.viz.video

• MAP :

application/vnd.vizrt.curious.map+xml

• TRIOSCROLL :

application/vnd.vizrt.trio.scrollelements+xml

Other links:

<link rel="..." href="http://..." type="..."/>

• Needed in order to select the URL to external resources. This can be images, videos, text, and so on.

• Limitation 1: The atom 1.0 specs allow multiple links with the same relation, but when linking a tabfield to a link in Trio, only the first link will be selected.

• Limitation 2: Trio can only use the

href URL as the value. It cannot download the resource at the URL and use its contents as the value. The Viz Engine control plugin for the property has to be able to understand the URL and download the resource.

5.24.5

Feed Browsing

Given a valid Field Linking URL the elements can now be browsed and selected in the

Feed Browser window. Example in the screenshot below uses the link

Page 112 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

http://d63hzfu0kdpt5.cloudfront.net/vizrt_training/vizrt-trainingfeed.xml

Authentication:

The feed browser supports basic HTTP authentication. The server must return a

HTTP header based on the HTTP standard, like this:

WWW-Authenticate: Basic realm="..."

Searching and Filtering:

If the feed supports OpenSearch then the search box will be enabled and all searches will be done on the server. If not then the search box will be a local text filter box.

See Also

Field Linking

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 113

5.25

Timeline Editor

The Timeline Editor is used to add graphics to a video timeline.

Viz Trio User’s Guide

In short you search for a video using the

Search Media editor. When you have found the

appropriate video, it is possible to open the video in the Timeline editor.

The Timeline editor offers basic functionality for adding graphics to the video timeline.

When using data elements (graphics), the Timeline editor will add them as placeholders on the video timeline. The placeholders will display snapshots of the graphics as video overlays (fetched from Preview Server). The placeholders can of course be manually adjusted on the timeline.

A story item containing clip and graphics references from the Timeline editor will appear as a group in the playlist. Issuing a

Take command on the group will trigger the video clip and timed graphics.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Timeline Editor Functions

Working with the Timeline Editor

Troubleshooting and Known Limitations

5.25.1

Timeline Editor Functions

This section contains information on the following topics:

Editor Control Bar Functions

Multiple Tracks in the Timeline Editor

Keyboard Shortcuts for Timeline Editor

Editor Control Bar Functions

Page 114 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

The Timeline editor is divided in two; a control bar and a preview window.

The control bar contains the following functions.

Timeline Editor functions

Function Description

Play or Pause the clip.

Adjust the volume of the clip.

Delete the currently selected graphics from the timeline.

Scrub marker (cursor). Drag to scrub the clip.

Set the mark-in point to the current position of the cursor.

Set the mark-out point to the current position of the cursor.

Jump the cursor to the mark-in point.

Jump the cursor to mark-out point.

Play only the area between the mark-in and mark-out points.

Drag the Zoom control to increase or decrease the time scale shown on the timeline.

Multiple Tracks in the Timeline Editor

The Timeline editor supports multiple tracks for transition logic scenes. This allows graphics to overlap and play out correctly, but requires that all data elements are based on the same transition logic set.

The tracks reflect the layers in the transition logic scene. A track is displayed in the

Timeline editor if an element using that layer has been added.

Graphics from the same layer should not be overlapped, and the Timeline editor will indicate a possible conflict by coloring the graphics placeholders red.

Keyboard Shortcuts for Timeline Editor

Key

Mouse wheel

Description

Zoom in and out

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 115

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Key

CTRL + ‘+’

CTRL + ‘-’

CTRL + ‘0’

Insert

Enter

Del

Space

SHIFT + Space

CTRL + Arrow

CTRL + SHIFT + Arrow

CTRL + ALT + Arrow

CTRL + ALT + SHIFT + Arrow

CTRL + L

CTRL + R

CTRL + ALT + L

CTRL + ALT + R

CTRL + H

CTRL + E

Description

Zoom in

Zoom out

Reset zoom

Add new graphics

Open selected data element for editing

Remove currently selected graphics from timeline

Play/Pause

Play only the area between the mark-in and markout points

Move graphics in small steps back and forth on the timeline

Move graphics in big steps back and forth on the timeline

Increase or decrease duration by a small amount

Increase or decrease duration by a large amount

Move the selected graphics next to the one to the left

Move the selected graphics next to the one to the right

Stretch the selected graphics next to the one to the left

Stretch the selected graphics next to the one to the right

Sets video position to start of the clip

Sets video position to end of the clip

Note: Media keyboard shortcuts for play, pause and mute should also work.

See Also

Working with the Timeline Editor

5.25.2

Working with the Timeline Editor

This section contains information on the following topics:

To add graphics to a video clip timeline

Page 116 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

To edit a composite element

To set the Mark-in or Mark-out point

To view the Mark-in or Mark-out point

Known Limitations

To add graphics to a video clip timeline

1.

Drag a video from the Search Media

editor to a playlist.

Note: The video must be dragged to a playlist in order to add graphics and create a composite element. Videos that are dragged to a page list cannot have graphics added.

2.

Double-click the video item.

• The item will open in the Timeline editor.

• If the video does not appear in the Timeline editor as expected, read the

important notes in the Troubleshooting and Known Limitations

section.

3.

To add graphics, drag an item from the page list to the timeline.

• A graphics placeholder will appear on the timeline.

4.

Use the mark-in/mark-out points to adjust the duration of the animation.

5.

Optional: Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more graphics.

Note: Graphics may be overlaid on the timeline; however, graphics that use the same layer (front, middle, back or transition logic layer) will not play out correctly.

6.

Click the Save button in the upper right corner to create a new composite element, consisting of both the video and graphics combined.

• The composite element is presented in the playlist with the video element as parent, and the graphics items as children.

To edit a composite element

1.

First, create a composite element, consisting of both video and one or more

graphics items, see To add graphics to a video clip timeline

.

2.

Double-click the composite element in the playlist.

• The item will open in the Timeline editor.

3.

Add graphics by dragging it to the timeline.

4.

Click the Save as button in the upper right corner to update the composite element.

To set the Mark-in or Mark-out point

1.

In the Timeline editor, scrub the cursor to the desired frame.

2.

Click the Set Mark-in or Set Mark-out button.

To view the Mark-in or Mark-out point

1.

In the Timeline editor, click the Jump to Mark-in or Jump to Mark-out button.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 117

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.25.3

Troubleshooting and Known Limitations

The following notes may be helpful if you are having problems working with the

Timeline editor:

Video Codecs

Viz Engine Configuration

Known Limitations

Video Codecs

If you are previewing proxy versions of video clips from Viz One using the Timeline editor you must install video codecs that are not part of the basic Viz Trio installation.

Note that the setup procedures of

Video Codecs are only relevant when using the

Timeline editor and not Viz Trio as such. Playout of high resolution versions on Viz

Engine do not require these codecs.

See Also

• Installation of

Video Codecs

Viz Engine Configuration

In order to work with video clips from Viz One in the Timeline editor, Viz Engine must be configured accordingly.

Known Limitations

• Graphics may be overlaid on the timeline; however, graphics that use the same layer (front, middle, back or transition logic layer) will not play out correctly. The

Timeline editor will always indicate a possible conflict by coloring the graphics placeholders red. To use overlapping graphics based on transition logic scenes, see

Multiple Tracks in the Timeline Editor .

• Current limitations on the Media Sequencer will cause the following behavior:

1.

If you issue a

Take on a timed group (1), and while that group is played out issue a

Take on an graphics in another layer (2), the Media Sequencer will, when issuing the timed

Take Out command (for the timed graphics), take out the last taken element instead (2).

2.

Hence, it is currently not recommended to take other data elements on-air while a timed group is being played out.

• The Timeline editor may behave unexpectedly in somt virtual machine- or remote desktop-environments.

Page 118 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.26

Viz Trio Keyboard

Viz Trio is designed to be operated by mouse and keyboard or by keyboard only. In the explanation below, an overview of the Viz Trio keyboard is described. For users with the old Cherry keyboard, please refer to the

Cherry Keyboard chapter.

The keyboard contains two rows with extra function keys which have been assigned to different Viz Trio actions. The keyboard has its own configuration software. A Viz Trio configuration file must be loaded to create the correct keyboard map. In the Viz Trio client a keyboard mapping file must be imported to assign the correct actions to the keys. This is pre-installed on all Viz Trio clients, so normally these settings will not have to be changed.

For information on how to import a keyboard mapping file and assign shortcuts, see the

Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros

section.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Editing Keys

Navigation Keys

Program and Preview Keys

Editing Keys

The green keys all perform editing operations. The current tab field must have the property of the key exposed for editing. If not, the key will have no effect and an error message will be written to the log file when the key is pressed.

POS: Displays the position editor.

TEXT: Displays the text editor.

ROTATE: Displays the rotation editor.

KERN: Displays the character kerning editor.

SCALE: Displays the scaling editor.

OBJECT: Displays the object pool where one can browse for 2D and 3D objects.

HIDE/UNHIDE: Hides/shows the tab field.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 119

Viz Trio User’s Guide

COLOR: Shows the pool of colors.

EFFECT: Opens the Effect editor.

IMAGE: Opens the Image pool.

Navigation Keys

The white keys allow a switch between different views and editors in the program.

DESIGN: Opens Viz Trio in design mode displaying the designer tool user interface.

PLAYOUT: Opens Viz Trio in playout mode displaying the playout user interface.

SETTINGS: Displays the Show Settings dialog.

ROLL/CRAWL: Opens the Scroll editor.

PAGE LIST: Displays the Page List.

CHG SHOW: Opens the Open Show window.

EDITOR: Displays the Page editor.

IMPORT: Opens the Import Scenes dialog.

PREV: If extra page views are defined, this key shows the view above the one

currently active, see the Add Page List View

section.

NEXT: If extra page views are defined, this key shows the view below the one currently active.

Program and Preview Keys

Page 120

The red function keys all affect actions on the program channel. The blue keys all affect actions on the preview channel.

UPDATE: When a change has been done to a page that is already on-air, hitting update will merge in the changes without running any animations. This is typically used for fixing typing errors. If a page is updated and Take is used instead of

Update, all animation directors in the scene will be executed which normally creates an unwanted hard cut effect.

TAKE+ READ NEXT: Takes the page currently read, and reads the next one in the list.

SWAP: The swap key takes to air what is currently read and visible on the preview, and it takes off what is currently on-air and reads that page again.

INIT: Initializes the current show on both the program and preview channel.

CLR PGM: Clears all loaded content on the program channel.

CLR PVW: Clears the preview channel.

SAVE: Saves the page currently shown on the preview channel.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

SAVE AS: Saves the page currently shown on the preview channel to the page number typed in.

CONTINUE: When a page halts at a stop point, hitting the Continue key will make the animation continue.

TAKE OUT: If transition logic is used, the Take Out key will take out any page loaded in the layer that is currently read. If transition logic is not used, the Take Out key will perform a clear which will be a hard cut. To obtain a smooth out animation, the scene must be designed with a stop point and an out animation and the Continue key must be used to take out the page.

READ PREV: Reads the previous page in the page list.

READ: Reads the page currently highlighted by the cursor.

TAKE: Performs a Take on the page that is currently read, and plays it out.

See Also

Cherry Keyboard

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 121

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 122 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6 Configuration Interface

Select File > Configuration to show the configuration window. The configuration window has four buttons that apply for all configuration settings made:

OK: Applies any changes, and closes the window.

Cancel: Closes the window.

Apply: Applies any changes without closing the window.

Reset: Resets all changes made, unless they are applied locally.

Select the menu item you want to display, or change, from the menu list on the left.

Use the panel on the right to review or change the setting value(s). The menu items are as follows and are explained in the next sections:

User Interface

Output

Viz Graphic Hub

Viz Pilot Database

Connectivity

Import/Export Settings

6.1

6.1.1

User Interface

This section contains the user interface settings that are specific to the local Viz Trio client. It does not affect any other Viz Trio clients using the same Media Sequencer.

This section contains information on the following topics:

General

Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros

Text Editor

Page List/Playlist

Paths

Local Preview

User Restrictions

General

To view the

General configuration settings

, click User Interface > General in the Trio

Configuration.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 123

General configuration settings

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 124

Allow Alphanumeric Imports: Enables import of scenes with alphanumeric names.

Enable Tabbing: Use this setting to enable or disable the default behavior of the tabulator key. When enabled tabbing will iterate through the tab-fields of the element currently read.

Enable the numpad: Use this setting to enable or disable the default behavior of the numeric keypad (numpad). When enabled, the numpad will type directly into the callup field. Holding down the CTRL button will disable this function

Only allow callup codes with numeric values: When checked, this setting will only allow callup codes with numeric values when a page is read or saved. When unchecked, this setting will allow all values.

Show Tabfield List: Select this option for the tab field list to be visible.

Callup digits: Select how many digits to use for the callup codes.

Automatic look-up of media elements when reading: When enabled, this option will automatically display the video in the video search area when a video element is read. Note that this will slow down the reading of the element.

Autoupdate external preview: When selected, the external preview channel will be automatically updated when a page is edited in the Viz Trio client. When not selected, the external preview channel will only update its preview when the page is saved.

Single Machine Mode: This should be set on Viz Trio NV (no video) systems where the machine both functions as client- and output machine. This is to separate the control commands that goes to the output machine from those going to the local preview.

Autoupdate cache for image browser: When enabled (default), the Viz Trio client will update the local image browser cache automatically and add any images that are new and update those which have changed. With very large image trees this update process might slow down the system response. To achieve better system response when the image tree is very large, disable this option.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.1.2

Disable initial loading of icons in the pooleditor: When enabled, this setting will prevent the Viz pool browser from being loaded the first time a tab field, with for example Viz geometries or images, is selected. The icons are loaded when clicking in the browser or changing the path.

Reload the current page if it is changed on the MSE (from another client or

II): If this setting is on, the currently read page is reloaded (read again) if it changes on the server.

Loglevel: Defines what kind of log messages that should be logged. Possible levels are: 0, 1, 2, 5, and 9. For mor information, see

Viz Trio Log Levels .

Script Loglevel: Sets which log level to use when running scripts. It defaults to -1 , which is no logging. So if a script triggers a viz command, the script log level must be set to 9 to see the Viz Engine command in the log file.

Onair Password: Sets an on-air password. When set, all users will be prompted for the password when trying to take a Viz Trio client off- or on-air.

Viz World Maps Editor: Defines the Viz World Map Editor (WME) to be launched when a map is added to the template. For more information on how to work with maps, please read the Viz World User’s Guide.

Note: The WME component requires a Viz World Client installation locally and a connection to one or more Viz World Server(s) or a Server Allocator.

Lite Edition (Inline): This embedded Map Editor has reduced functionality for map selection.

Classic Edition: Classic is the default editor. All the map features are exposed and the user has full control over the map selected.

Second Edition (SE): Second Edition is the next generation map editor. It is more user friendly and will soon have a full set of features.

Ignore Nameless tabfields during read: When enabled, this setting will discard error messages for tab fields with no name.

Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros

To view the

Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros configuration settings

, click User

Interface > Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros in the Trio Configuration.

Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros configuration settings

In this section keyboard shortcuts can be defined for the different operations in the program. These shortcuts are global, which means that they are valid for all page folders. Local keyboard shortcuts can be specified per show by adding keyboard

shortcuts and macros under the Show Properties .

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 125

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.1.3

Import and Export: The Import and Export function can be used to import and export shortcut settings to and from an XML-file for backup and reuse of typical configurations.

Note: The keyboard file has a *.kbd file extension.

Add Macro: The Add Macro button allows an operator to write a Viz Trio macro command, and link it to a shortcut key.

Add Script: The Add Script button allows an operator to write a Visual Basic script, and link it to a shortcut key.

If a key combination is already in use, you are given the option of overriding it. This will leave the other command without an assigned keyboard shortcut.

Macros and scripts that are custom made can be removed using the Remove button.

Select the custom made shortcut and click Remove. Note that no warning is issued when performing this operation.

IMPORTANT! Avoid using SHIFT as part of a command as this will disable the possibility to use the assigned key when writing characters (e.g. in upper case).

Usage hints for the default keyboard bindings:

Ctrl+N and Ctrl+P are default bound to tabfield:next_property and

tabfield:previous_property. They can be used to navigate between several tab-field properties under one tab-field, for example when working with text and kerning.

Ctrl+TAB and Ctrl+Shif+TAB can be used to move keyboard focus around inside the tab-field editors.

TAB and Shift+TAB can be used to move keyboard focus around as if the page editor is not active or no page is read.

See Also

Macro Language

Macro Commands and Events

Scripting

Text Editor

To view the Text Editor configuration settings, click User Interface > Text Editor in the Trio Configuration.

The text editor contains general settings related to text formats and how to replace key characters.

General

Page 126

Use CTRL+A Selection: When deselected, the normal key combination for selecting all text, CTRL+A will be disabled.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Support Unicode text-selection: Use this setting to enable or disable support for

Unicode text-selection. This option is used if the default language for non-Unicode programs in Windows is set to a Unicode language. For example: If copying text from a text editor that by default does not support Unicode language into Viz Trio.

The representation of text would not be correct.

Text import format: This option allows a character set to be specified for text imported and interpreted by Viz Trio. By default this is set to UTF-8.

Word Replace

Word replace allows key characters to have replace words defined. The list of replacement options becomes available in the text editor when running the

text:show_replace_list command, see the

User Interface

section for how to define keyboard shortcuts.

The text editor matches the typed character with the list of key characters configured, and displays the corresponding replacement list. The word correction function is case sensitive, making it possible to define replacement options for both lower and upper case letters. The list of word correction options is local.

Key characters: Shows a list of defined replacement key characters.

Correct options: Shows a list of a key character’s corresponding replacement options.

Add: To add Correct options, a key character must be added first. To add Correct

options, select the key character, and click the associated Add button.

Remove: Select a list item to remove, and click the associated Remove button.

Folder: Imports a predefined list exported to an XML file.

Save: Exports the predefined list to an XML file.

Example

<entry name="customcharacters">

<entry name="A">

<entry name="CBS"></entry>

<entry name="CNN"></entry>

<entry name="BBC"></entry>

<entry name="ITN"></entry>

<entry name="NBC"></entry>

<entry name="NRK"></entry>

<entry name="YLE"></entry>

<entry name="SVT"></entry>

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 127

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.1.4

<entry name="CCTV"></entry>

<entry name="TV2"></entry>

<entry name="ZDF"></entry>

<entry name="RTL"></entry>

</entry></entry>

Page List/Playlist

To view the Page List/Playlist configuration settings, click User Interface > Page List/

Playlist in the Trio Configuration.

This section contains general settings as well as cursor and color settings for the Page

List.

This section contains information on the following topics:

General

Cursor

General

Page 128

Hide empty locked groups: This setting will prevent locked groups with no pages from being displayed in the page list.

Select next element in playlist after read: When enabled, the next element in the playlist will automatically be selected after a read operation.

Remove MOS-playlist from show: Removes newsroom playlists that are monitored using the MOS protocol when the show is closed. Setting this to Yes will also affect other clients connected to the same Media Sequencer. The available options are: Yes, No and Ask.

Automatically reactivate playlists when profile changes: If enabled, active playlists are reactivated when the current profile is changed.

Automatically activate show when opening: If selected, automatically activate the show when opened. Please be aware that this option, if used, could put a high load on the Media Sequencer.

Use Preview Server to load thumbnails: If selected, use Preview Server

to load thumbnails.

Note: Use a filter with Description Equals with Value = blank/nothing to automatically hide a group without a name from being displayed in the page list.

This replaces the older configuration option “Hide nameless group”.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Cursor

6.1.5

Autopreview (single-click read): When enabled, a page will be read as soon as it is selected.

Autocenter cursor: With this function enabled, the cursor will have a static position when the page list is longer than the Page List window. In these situations the window is provided with a scrollbar on the right side. With Autocenter Cursor enabled, as long as some pages are hidden in the direction the list is browsed, the cursor will remain static and the list items will move instead. When the last item is revealed, the cursor will start to move again.

Paths

To view the

Paths configuration settings

, open File > Configuration > User

Interface > Paths in the Trio Configuration.

This section describes the directories settings for several functions. All settings are local to the specific Viz Trio client.

Paths configuration settings

• Avi Path: Sets the default location when browsing for AVI files.

• Dif Path: Sets the default location when browsing for DIF files.

• Image Path: Sets the default location when browsing for Image files.

• Audio Path: Sets the default location when browsing for Audio files.

• Script Path: Sets the default directory to file-based scripts that may be assigned to a

Viz Trio show and/or template.

Trio Logfile Path: Sets the path to the directory where the Viz Trio client should store log files. For more information, see

To change the Viz Trio log file path

.

MSE As-Run Logfile: Sets the path to the Media Sequencer as-run log file. This log file offers a Media Sequencer logging mechanism for all elements that have been taken on air. The as-run log file is an additional debugging tool which a Viz Trio administrator may want to enable to verify that the communication between the

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 129

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.1.6

Media Sequencer and the playout engine is working properly. The file name may be given with either relative or absolute path.

Note: This is a global setting, affecting all clients connecting to the specified

Media Sequencer. Also note that the as-run log file ends up on the Media

Sequencer host, not on the local Viz Trio machine. Read more abot the as-run log file in the Media Sequencer documentation at http://<mse-host>:8580/

mse_manual.html#as-run-log.

Shared Temp Folder: Used for temporary files when importing or exporting Viz

Trio shows on an external Viz Engine. This must be a network share that is both accessible for the client and the external Viz Engine.

Help Path: Sets the path for the main help file. Help will be opened when pressing

F1 or when clicking View Help under Help in the main menu.

Local Preview

To view the

Local Preview configuration settings

, click User Interface > Local

Preview in the Trio Configuration.

Local Preview configuration settings

6.1.7

Viz Connection Timeout: Sets the number of milliseconds until the local Viz

Engine renderer times out. Changes to this setting requires a restart of Viz Trio.

Font Encoding: Sets the font encoding format of text sent to the local preview.

This setting overrides the local Viz preview and requires a restart of Viz Trio to take effect. Note that this does not have an effect on remote Viz Engines; hence, the font options for Viz must be set accordingly. Also note that the Viz Trio interface only supports the font encoding set for the operating system under the Regional and

Language Options settings (i.e. support for complex script, right-to-left and East

Asian languages).

Single Layer Transition Logic Preview: Enable previewing of single-layer pages in the background scene. If this setting is disabled, only Combo pages will be previewed in the background scene.

In the Local Preview Resolution section the aspect ratio for the local preview window can be set, and the systems refresh rate defined (normally 50 for PAL and 60 for NTSC).

User Restrictions

To view the

User Restrictions configuration settings

, click User Interface > User

Restrictions in the Trio Configuration.

Page 130 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

User Restrictions configuration settings

The User Restrictions section allows an administrator to deny the operator from performing certain actions in Viz Trio.

Designer:

Access the full tree in design mode: When checked, prevents the operator from accessing the Full Tree view when using Viz Trio Designer.

Customize the designer buttons: When checked, disables the option to customize and create new resource buttons.

Enter design mode: When checked, disables the Design button (upper right) preventing the operator from going into Designer mode.

Save scenes outside of the default vizpath: When checked, prevents the operator from saving scenes outside the default Viz scene path set under

Show

Properties

.

Page:

Delete Templates: When checked, prevents the operator from deleting templates from the show. Command:

show:delete_templates.

Direct Takeout Pages: When checked, prevents the operator from issuing a direct take out command on pages in a show. This also disables the context menu option for the show. Command:

page:direct_takeout.

Direct Takeout Pages from a Playlist: When checked, prevents the operator from issuing a direct take out command on pages in a playlist. Command:

playlist:direct_take_out_selected.

Rename pages: When checked, it is not possible to rename saved pages in the page list.

Save values to linked databases: When checked (default), prevents the operator from saving values back to the database.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 131

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.2

Takeout Pages: When checked, prevents the operator from using the Take Out command. This also disables the Take Out button in the Page editor. Command:

page:takeout.

Post Rendering:

Enter new hostnames in post render view: When checked, prevents the operator from adding new hostnames to the Render Videoclip editor.

Scripts:

Edit scripts: When checked, prevents the operator from editing the script using the Edit Script button in the Page editor. Command:

gui:show_scripteditor.

Scroll Editor:

Create new scroll templates: When checked, prevents the operator from creating new scroll templates. Command:

gui_show_scroll_template_creator.

Shows:

Access show settings: When checked, prevents the operator from accessing the Show settings. Command:

gui:show_settings.

Browse external playlists: When checked, disables the Playlists

tab under

Show Control

, and consequently preventing the operator from browsing for playlists on the Media Sequencer.

Browse viz directories when changing shows: When checked, disables

the Viz Directories

tab under Show Control

, and consequently preventing the operator from browsing the Viz directory to set a show path.

Create or rename shows: When checked, prevents the operator from creating

new Shows

or renaming existing shows.

Delete all pages in a show: When checked, prevents the operator from selecting and deleting all pages in the show in one operation. Normal page by page and page group deletion is still possible.

Open the window for importing templates into a show: When checked, prevents the operator from importing new scenes from Viz Graphic Hub (Viz 3.x) or the data root (Viz 2.x).

Trio:

Call Viz Trio Commands: When checked, prevents the operator from manually calling Trio Commands. This does not prevent scripts from doing the same.

Command:

gui:show_triocommands. See

Working with Macro Commands .

Cleanup External Renderers: When checked, prevents the operator from issuing a cleanup renderer command. Command:

trio_cleanup_renderers.

Switch to Viz Artist: When checked, prevents the operator from switching to

Viz Artist mode. Command:

gui:artist_mode.

Output

To view the

Output configuration settings

, click Output in the Trio Configuration.

Page 132 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Output configuration settings

An important part of the output configuration is to create profiles for different purposes. For example;

Profile Setups

can be created where different channels have the program and preview function. This makes it fast and easy to switch between different output settings.

In the Output channels section profiles can be defined with different program and preview channels. Most common is to define a studio with channels mapped to renderer machines (Viz Engine hosts).

Single Machine Configuration (Viz Trio OneBox) Viz Trio setups with more than one

Graphical Processing Unit (GPU) may run both preview and program channels locally.

The first time Viz Trio starts, and detects more than one GPU, it will automatically add a

Viz Engine host named LocalProgramChannel with host localhost:6800.

Note: The LocalProgramChannel host will only be set once unless the Media

Sequencer is reset.

Currently Viz Trio supports four methods for resolving which channel is the local

program channel. If an unsupported method is used, the Connection Status button will

not show up in the Status Bar . Consequently the operator will not be able to control the

local program channel status.

Valid methods for resolving the local program channel name

Method

localhost

Comment

For the program channel remember to add the port 6800.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 133

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.2.1

6.2.2

Method

127.*.*.*

Hostname

IP

Comment

Not only 127.0.0.1 refers to localhost.

Name of computer without domain.

The computer’s IP. If the computer has multiple IPs (e.g. it has multiple network cards), it may still fail.

IMPORTANT! The computer may have several names (e.g. in /etc/hosts), but only the NetBIOS name can be used (i.e. the one obtained when running the "hostname" command). It is also not possible to add the domain (e.g.

<hostname>.domain.internal).

This section contains information on the following topics:

Program and Preview Channels

Profile Setups

Forked Execution

Working With the Profile Configuration

Upgrading Old Profiles

Program and Preview Channels

Local preview is Viz Trio’s embedded render window. It is placed in the lower right corner and always shows the last read page. It displays the graphics in a true WYSIWYG manner (what you see is what you get) when editing a page. Text and images change immediately as text and images are added to the page. Select which elements to edit by pointing and clicking on them with the mouse directly in the render window.

External preview (optional) is a separate Viz Engine renderer with its own reference monitor that displays a true preview. It shows how the program channel will look like before the page is taken to air.

Program is a separate Viz Engine renderer that renders the content that is taken onair.

Profile Setups

Profile setups

Profile

Main

Backup

Program

A (Viz 1)

B (Viz 2)

Preview

B (Viz 2)

A typical profile setup is a two-channel setup, program and preview, with one render engine assigned to each channel. A more advanced setup is the use of forked execution. As the term suggests, forked execution is a way to configure a single output channel to contain multiple render engines.

Page 134 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.2.3

Profiles are used to create different setups. An example for when it makes sense to use different setups would be in a backup configuration where a switch from a main renderer to a backup is needed. For example if two output renderers are named A and

B, where A is program and B is preview, a profile named "Main" will then have channel

A=program and channel B=preview.

A profile named "Backup" could, if the renderer that is acting as program (A) in the

"Main" profile fails, have channel B=Program.

The playout can also be controlled through a General Purpose Input (GPI), for instance through hardware such as a vision mixer.

When GPI is enabled, the external cursor (the GPI system’s cursor) will be displayed/ shown in any client that is using the same profile as the external system. A typical setup would be that one Viz Trio client is in the same profile as the GPI system, and functions as a "prepare station" for the producer sitting at the vision mixer desk. Data elements are then made ready and displayed on a preview visible to the producer, and then the elements are triggered from the vision mixer. This configuration needs a separate "GPI" profile that is not used by other control application clients. Other clients can be in other profiles and produce content to the same output channels. However, they need to be on other transition layers or on another Viz layer so that they will not interfere with the graphics controlled by the external system.

A channel can be designated as a Program or Preview channel by selecting the check box in the appropriate columns (Program or Preview). The program and preview channels are reciprocally exclusive - only one channel can be set to program, and only one channel can be set to preview. If for example A is set to program and B is set to preview, and then C is set to program, A will no longer be set as program.

When configured to use video in graphics from a video server (for example Viz One), it is currently recommended to use IP addresses for both the Viz and Video channels in order to visualize the transfer progress correctly; hence, a hostname on the Viz channel will work, but not on the Video channel. They must also match the video configuration for both program and preview.

The Video device configuration is used when configured to trigger video elements in a video server setup, hence, it is not used for other video server configurations. The

Video device configuration is only used for playout of video clips from video servers.

IMPORTANT! Current limitations require both the graphics and video channel(s) to use an IP address.

See Also

Forked Execution

Forked Execution

Forked execution can be used with standalone and transition logic scenes. It also replaces the execution of visible containers.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Standalone scenes

Transition logic scenes

Visible containers

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 135

Page 136

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Standalone scenes

Forked execution supports standalone scenes by executing the same graphics with different concepts on two or more render engines. Concepts are defined per channel

when Working With the Profile Configuration

tool.

As an option you can also use this setup to handle fail situations by having the same graphics concept rendered on both engines.

Transition logic scenes

As with

Standalone scenes , forked execution supports setting concepts for Transition

Logic scenes. In addition Transition Logic scenes, by defining channels with different render engine setups, can show different states of the same scene on a per engine basis. All states are synchronized for all engines (at all times) in order to achieve an artifact-free and smooth morphing of the graphics from one state to the other.

If for example you have three render engines you can set up a range of channels with different combinations of render engines per channel.

C

D

E

Channel

A

B

1

2,3

2

Viz Engines

1,2,3

1,3

If for example you have a scene with four layers each layer can be controlled separately from the other layers (see table below). By setting a state per layer you can achieve a varied output depending on the channel used and how that channel is configured in terms of render engines (see table above).

• Layer 1: Shows and hides a geometry (e.g. a cube)

• Layer 2: Shows and hides some text

• Layer 3: Positions the geometries

• Layer 4. Animates the layer 1 geometry by showing the next image or a logo

States for layer 1 States for layer 2 States for layer 3 States for layer 4

Show cube Show text Position left Next image

Hide cube

<ignore>

Hide text

<ignore>

Position right

Position center

<ignore>

Show logo

<ignore>

With the aforementioned scene layers and configured channels you can have the following output on each of the three engines.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.2.4

Channel E

(Viz 2)

Channel A

(Viz 1,2,3)

Channel A

(Viz 1,2,3)

Channel A

(Viz 1,2,3)

Channel A

(Viz 1,2,3)

Channel B

(Viz 1,3)

Channel E

(Viz 2)

Channel

Channel C

(Viz 1)

Channel D

(Viz 2,3)

Layer state Output on Viz Engine 1, 2 and 3

Show cube

Pos left

Show text

Show logo

Show cube

Pos right

Show Text

Show Logo

Pos center

Hide text

Next image

Next image

Show text

Next image

Show logo

Hide cube

Hide cube

Visible containers

Viz Trio still support, though it is considered deprecated, a behavior similar to that of forked execution. By designing a standalone scene where each root container is a variant of the other, you can configure each render engine to render specific containers

(by name). In effect a scene with two or more root containers can have one or several containers assigned and rendered visible by one render engine.

Due to potential performance issues when using large textures (e.g. HD) this option is no longer recommended. Concept and variant design of standalone and transition logic scenes is therefore the recommended design convention.

See Also

Output

Working With the Profile Configuration

Viz Artist User’s Guide on Transition Logic

Working With the Profile Configuration

This section contains information on the following topics

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 137

Page 138

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• Profile configuration:

To open the profile configuration

To add a new profile

To rename a profile

To delete a profile

• Channel configuration:

To add an output channel to the Channels list

To rename an output channel in the Channels list

To remove an output channel from the Channels list

To add an output device to the Channels list

To remove an output device from the Channels list

To add a concept override for a channel’s output device

• Output device configuration:

To add a Viz Engine

To add a video device

To edit a Viz Engine or video device

To delete a Viz Engine or video device

To enable scene transitions

To enable still preview

To render specific scene containers

To set a different font encoding

To open the profile configuration

1.

Click the Config button (upper left), and then select Output.

2.

Right-click the profile on the status bar (lower-left) and select Profile

Configuration... from the appearing context menu.

To add a new profile

• In the Profile Configuration window click the New profile button, and in the appearing text field enter a new unique profile name, and press Enter.

To rename a profile

1.

Right-click the profile and from the appearing context menu select Edit Profile

Name, or simply double-click it and enter the new name.

2.

When finished editing the name, press Enter or click the cursor outside the

Profiles list.

To delete a profile

• Right-click the profile and from the appearing context menu select Delete Profile, or simply select it and press the Delete button.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

To add an output channel to the Channels list

• Click the New channel button, or drag and drop a Viz Engine or video device to the

Channels list.

To rename an output channel in the Channels list

• Right-click the channel and select Edit Channel Name from the appearing context menu, or double-click the name.

To remove an output channel from the Channels list

• Right-click the channel entry and selecte Delete channel from the appearing context menu, or select the channel and press the Delete button.

To add a concept override for a channel’s output device

1.

Expand the channel’s output device and append the concept name.

• This will override any concepts set elsewhere

2.

Click OK.

Caution: Note that concept names are case sensitive.

To add a Viz Engine

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 139

Viz Trio User’s Guide

1.

Click the Add Viz... button in the Profile Setups window to open the Configure

Viz Engine dialog box.

2.

Enter the hostname and port (optional).

3.

Click OK.

• A status indicator will show if the renderer is on-air.

To add a video device

Page 140

1.

Click the Add Video... button in the Profile Setups window to open the Configure

Video Device dialog box.

2.

Select the video server Type.

3.

Type the Host or IP address.

4.

Enter the Port number (optional).

5.

Select a publishing point from the Asset Storage list, so that stand-alone clips and clips used in pages or data elements are transferred to the right location (the specified Viz Engine) for playout.

6.

If the Fullscreen check box is selected, it is possible to define additional values

(Use Transitions and Fullscreen Scene) in order to provide transition effects from one video to another.

Note: The fullscreen values are only available for Viz Engines, not MVCP video devices.

IMPORTANT! Trio by default sets the "Fullscreen Scene" in Media Sequencer to "Vizrt/System/transitions" when you switch on "Use Transitions". Using this default, clip channel must be 1 and the alternate clip channel must be 2. Only when using other transition scenes can these settings be changed.

7.

Select the Clip Channel to use.

Note: Viz Engine from 3.6 support up to 16 clip channels which can be used for playout. A clip channel might be unavailable for various reasons; it is configured to be inactive in Viz Config, the license only covers a limited number of clip channels, and so on. Note that Media Sequencer prior to version 2.0.1 imposed some restrictions, see note below.

8.

Alternate Clip Channel: When using videoclip transitions the clip from "Clip

Channel" will transition to the clip from "Alternate Clip Channel" and the next

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide clip will transition from "Alternate Clip Channel" back to the "Clip Channel".

The transition clip channel is enabled in the configuration window only if Use

Transitions are switched on.

9.

Click OK.

• A status indicator will show if the video device is online.

IMPORTANT! Media Sequencer up to and including version 2.0.0 imposes the following limitations: Clip channels 3-16 not supported when using fullscreen clips.

Clip channels 2-16 not supported when using transitions. Using alternate clip channel setting not supported. These restrictions are lifted starting with Media

Sequencer version 2.0.1 and higher.

Tip: If you to transfer video from Vizrt’s MAM systems you can use the default profile (unless you configure a profile manually in both systems yourself).

To edit a Viz Engine or video device

• Right-click the device and select Edit from the appearing context menu, or simply

double-click it.

To delete a Viz Engine or video device

• Right-click the device and select Delete from the appearing context menu, or simply select it and press the Delete button.

To add an output device to the Channels list

• Simply drag and drop a Viz Engine or video device onto the channel in the

Channels list, or select it and from the appearing context menu select Add to

profile (creating a new channel) or Add to selected channel.

To remove an output device from the Channels list

• Right-click the Viz Engine or video device and from the appearing context menu select Delete Output, or simply select it and press Delete.

To enable scene transitions

1.

Configure the Viz Engine settings as seen in how

To add a Viz Engine

2.

Set the Mode to Scene Transitions

Scene Transitions: Allows the renderer to copy (or snapshot) the scenes to create a transition effect between them.

3.

Open the Show Properties , and set the Transition Path.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 141

Page 142

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• See also

Transition Effects

4.

Click OK

5.

Add the program renderer to the program channel

Note: To see the effects the program channel must be configured and on-air.

To enable still preview

1.

Create two channels, one for program and one for preview

2.

Configure the same render engine twice as seen in how To add a Viz Engine

3.

For the second render engine set the Mode to Still Preview

Still Preview: Allows you to use the program output to get a still preview. To achieve this the Media Sequencer creates a copy of the scene being read and sends commands to your program output renderer asking for a snapshot of the scene while the current scene on air is being rendered. Note that the port used for still preview is 50010.

4.

Click Ok

5.

Add the program renderer to the program channel and the still preview renderer to the preview channel

Warning: This setup requires sufficient ring buffer on the program renderer in order for the rendered still preview not to cause the scene on air to drop frames; hence, this setting is deprecated.

To render specific scene containers

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.2.5

1.

Configure the Viz Engine settings as seen in how

To add a Viz Engine .

2.

Click the Deprecated settings button to expand the editor.

3.

Enter the scene’s container name(s) that should be rendered visible to the Visible containers

field.

4.

Optional: Press Enter to add another container name

5.

Click Ok

To set a different font encoding

1.

Configure the Viz Engine settings as seen in how

To add a Viz Engine

2.

Click the Deprecated settings button to expand the editor

3.

Select the Font encoding

Font encoding: Sets the font encoding of the Viz Engine. The encoding can either be set to UTF-8 or ISO-8859-1. Default is UTF-8.

4.

Click Ok.

Upgrading Old Profiles

If you are running Viz Trio versions prior to 2.10.1, and you want to reuse your current profile setup you need to be aware of the following facts:

When Viz Trio starts, it makes copies of the old profiles and give them a new name using the old name with a tag appended at the end:

<profile name> (Upgraded)

The old profile name will be kept as is, and can only be used by Viz Trio versions older than 2.10.1.

• Old profiles from older versions are disabled in the new profile configuration; however, you can delete them.

• Old profiles will not show up in the profile selector on the status bar, the intelligent interface configuration or the VDCP configuration.

• Old profiles have a tool tip with the name of the upgraded profile.

The new profile name (with the

Upgraded tag) should be used by Viz Trio 2.10.1 and later.

• New profiles can be renamed without any problems.

• New profiles (both the upgraded ones and manually created ones) will be usable from old clients, but changes done will not have any effect.

Tip: When you have upgraded all clients, the old profiles can be deleted.

6.3

Viz Graphic Hub

To view the

Viz Graphic Hub configuration settings

, click Viz Graphic Hub in the Trio

Configuration.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 143

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Viz Graphic Hub configuration settings

The Viz Graphic Hub category contains settings for logging onto the Viz Graphic Hub.

All settings are local to the specific Viz Trio client.

Nameserver Host: Sets the hostname or IP address for the Viz DB server.

Database: Sets the name of the database.

User Name: Sets the user name used for logging on to the database.

Password: Sets the password used for logging on to the database.

Auto Login: Enables Viz Trio to log on automatically at startup.

Note: If the local Viz Engine’s Auto Login is enabled, this section is disabled.

6.4

6.4.1

Viz Pilot Database

This section is used for Viz Pilot (VCP) specific integrations such as the database that holds all data elements and thumbnails used in playlists, and the Viz Object Store image database setup.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Database Settings

Picture Database Settings

Database Settings

To view the Database configuration settings, click VCP Database > Database

Settings in the Trio Configuration.

The Viz Pilot Database pane is used to configure a Viz Pilot database connection.

Note: Before configuring a Viz Pilot (VCP) database connection, an Oracle 10g

Runtime client must be installed.

Page 144

Media Sequencer Connection String: The connection string field is used to configure a connection to the database. Specify the connection string using a TNS name alias or connection string.

TNS name alias: <username>/<password>@<tns alias>

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.4.2

Connection string: <username>/<password>@<hostname>/<SID>

Schema: Enter the name of the Oracle schema.

To configure the Viz Pilot database connection

1.

Click the Config button (upper left) to open the

Configuration Interface .

2.

Select the Database Settings under the VCP Database category, and enter the database connection string and schema.

• Example: pilot/[email protected]/VizrtDB.

• Default schema: PILOT.

3.

Click Apply to save the settings to the Media Sequencer.

4.

Close the configuration window and check that Viz Trio’s Status Bar shows a green

status indicator for the database (cylinder).

Note: The database schema name should always be written in upper case.

See Also

Picture Database Settings

• Viz Pilot User’s Guide

Picture Database Settings

To view the Picture Database configuration settings, click VCP Database > Picture

Database in the Trio Configuration.

The picture database is a connection to Viz Pilot’s database that allows you to Search

Media stored by Viz Object Store (VOS). In order to take advantage of VOS, two

configuration steps are needed.

Use Picture Database: Enables or disables the VOS picture database.

Picture Database Connection String: Sets the database connection string or

TNS name alias.

To configure the picture database

1.

Map the shared image drive used by Viz Object Store (VOS) on the Viz Trio and Viz

Engine machines.

2.

Enable the Use Picture Database option, and add the VCP database connection string.

3.

Click Apply.

Note: If a TNS name alias is configured it can be used as a replacement for the hostname and SID in the connection string.

See Also

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 145

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Database Settings

• Viz Pilot User’s Guide

• Viz Object Store User’s Guide

6.5

6.5.1

Connectivity

The connectivity section is used to configure different protocols that Viz Trio interfaces with. These are the Media Object Server (MOS) protocol, Intelligent Interface (IIF),

General Purpose Input (GPI), Video Disk Communication Protocol (VDCP), Newstar

MCU/AVS, and socket object settings that allows Viz Trio to act as client or a server in a socket connection.

This section contains information on the following topics:

MOS

Intelligent Interface

General Purpose Input (GPI)

Video Disk Communication Protocol (VDCP)

MCU/AVS

Socket Object Settings

Proxy

Viz One Configuration

MOS

To view the MOS configuration settings, click Connectivity > MOS in the Trio

Configuration.

MOS newsroom integration

Page 146

A Viz Gateway (i.e. MOS) connection allows Viz Trio to monitor playlists (see

Playlist

Modes

) from any Newsroom Computer System (NCS) that supports the Media Object

Server (MOS) protocol.

Newsroom Computer Systems (NCS) that support the MOS protocol can deliver newsroom playlists to Viz Trio through the Viz Gateway and Viz Pilot’s database; hence, a MOS integration requires a Viz Gateway, an Oracle database and Viz Pilot’s

Newsroom Component.

To establish a MOS connection, the NCS and Viz Gateway must be pre-configured with an NCS and MOS ID. These ID’s are set in the newsroom system.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Note: Most newsroom systems support the Media Object Server (MOS) protocol and/or the

Intelligent Interface

(IIF) protocols (e.g. Avid iNEWS ControlAir).

Viz Gateway, MOS configuration settings

Enable Gateway Configuration: When selected, enables the user to configure the

Viz Gateway connection. When enabled, an icon is also visible in the Status Bar .

Viz Gateway Connection: The controls in the Viz Gateway Connection section allows a start, stop, and restart action to be performed on a Viz Gateway connection.

Start: Starts the Viz Gateway connection.

Stop: Stops the Viz Gateway connection.

Restart: Restarts the Viz Gateway connection.

Viz Gateway Connection Config: Define Viz Gateway connection settings.

Messages per second limit: Sets how many messages per second that should be sent from Viz Gateway to the NCS. This is done to prevent flooding of the

NCS. 0 disables the message throttling.

Viz Gateway Host: IP address of the Viz Gateway host.

Viz Gateway Port: Connection port for the Viz Gateway.

MOS ID: Enter the ID of the connecting MOS device.

NCS ID: Specify the ID of the newsroom control system.

Send status changes back to NCS: Sends new status changes to the NCS.

Send channel assignment changes back to NCS: If enabled, will instruct the Media Sequencer to update channel assignments back to the Newsroom system. Hence the next time the MOS playlist gets updated the changed channel assignment stays at the changed element in Trio and is not overwritten by the previous channel value.

The

Database Settings for the Viz Pilot Database on the Media Sequencer must be

established in order for the Viz Gateway integration to work.

Note: MOS and NCS ID are not needed for Viz Gateway versions 2 and newer.

To configure a Viz Gateway connection

1.

Click the Config button to open the Configuration Interface

.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 147

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.5.2

2.

Select the MOS section found under the Connectivity category, and enter Viz

Gateway’s IP address and port number (default port is10640).

3.

Click Apply to save the settings to the Media Sequencer.

4.

Close the

Configuration Interface and check that Viz Trio’s status bar shows a

green status indicator for Viz Gateway (G).

5.

Click the Change Show button, and select the Playlists tab to test that

Playlist

Modes

are available.

IMPORTANT! It is required that Viz Trio sets the NCS and MOS IDs when connected to Viz Gateway versions prior to 2.0.

See Also

Database Settings

• Viz Gateway Administrator’s Guide

• Viz Pilot User’s Guide on Newsroom Component

Intelligent Interface

To view the Intelligent Interface configuration settings, click Connectivity >

Intelligent Interface in the Trio Configuration.

Page 148

The intelligent interface (IIF) configuration is used to set the parameters the automation system uses to connect to the Media Sequencer over the intelligent interface protocol. Further it defines the Viz Pilot playlist or Viz Trio show the automation system can control and on which output profile.

The Media Sequencer listens to a communications port and acts as the Character

Generator (CG) device side of the intelligent interface. The Media Sequencer expects the other side of the communications port to be connected to a newsroom system or similar system that knows how to talk one of the supported dialects of intelligent interface.

The Media Sequencer has two primary tasks:

• Receive callup data from a newsroom system and store it in the schedule.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• Trigger actions based on simulated keyboard commands it receives.

Properties and Parameters

• Port: Sets the serial communications port to be used.

• Baudrate: Sets the appropriate baud rate for the connection.

• Verbose: Makes the messages from the Intelligent Interface driver get displayed in the Media Sequencer console. This feature is useful when setting up the system.

• Show path: Sets the path of the playlist or show.

Select Show:

6.5.3

• Profile: Sets the appropriate profile to be used.

Encoding: Sets the appropriate font encoding for the connection.

Loglevel: Sets the Media Sequencer Logging

for the Media Sequencer.

Space means empty: If set to Yes, the graphics template’s default text (when creating an element) is replaced with a space. If set to No, the graphics element will show the default text unless it is manually changed and saved with no text.

See Also

Media Sequencer Logging

General Purpose Input (GPI)

To view the GPI configuration settings, click Connectivity > GPI in the Trio

Configuration.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 149

Page 150

Viz Trio User’s Guide

The GPI settings allows the Media Sequencer to be configured to handle GPI commands. The commands can be handled by the Media Sequencer itself (Server

Command) or forwarded to the Viz Trio client (Macro Command).

Both server and client side commands are profile specific (see

Output ), meaning that

the profile determines which Viz Trio client and potentially which Viz Engine(s) should execute a client and/or server command. It is therefore very important to assign the correct profile for each GPI action as they refer to unique profiles configured per client.

For example; A Viz Trio client has its own profile with two Viz Engines (program and preview) and receives a client command from a GPI on the Media Sequencer. The command executes some logic on the Viz Trio client that issues commands to the program renderer. If the correct profile is not set, such commands might end up on the wrong Viz Trio client and potentially on the wrong program renderer. The same would happen if the GPI action was defined as a server command; however, it would then trigger commands from the Media Sequencer to the Viz directly and not through the Viz

Trio client.

Show advanced: Displays all the settings in the GPI Settings frame.

Box Type: Select the type of GPI box that is being configured. The Box Type can be set to SRC-8, SRC-8 III or SeaLevel.

Port: Sets the port that the GPI box is connected to. The Port can be set to COM1-

COM17, or None.

Base Entry: This is the node in the Media Sequencer’s data structure where the systems look for the GPI actions. The base entry is by default set to /sys/gpi.

Baudrate: Sets the maximum rate of bits per second (bps) that you want data to be transmitted through this port. The Baud rate can be set to 110-921600. It is recommended to use the highest rate that is supported by the computer or device that is being used.

Stopbits: Sets the interval (bps) for when characters should be transmitted. Stop bits can be set to 1, 1.5, or 2.

Databits: Sets the number of data bits that should be used for each transmitted and received character. The communicating computer or device must have the same setting. The number of data bits can be set to 5, 6, 7 or 8.

Parity: Changes the type of error checking that is used for the selected port. The communicating computer or device must have the same setting. The parity can be set to:

Even: A parity bit may be added to make the number of 1's in the data bits even. This will enable error checking.

Odd: A parity bit may be added to make the number of 1's in the data bits odd.

This will enable error checking.

None: No parity bit will be added to the data bits sent from this port. This will disable error checking.

Mark: A parity bit set to 0 will be added.

Space: A parity bit set to 1 will be added.

Flowcontrol: Changes how the flow of data is controlled. The flow control can be set to:

None: No control of data flow.

XonXoff: Standard method of controlling the flow of data between two modems.

XonXoff flow control is sometimes referred to as software handshaking

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Hardware: Standard method of controlling the flow of data between a computer and a serial device. Hardware flow control is sometimes referred to as hardware handshaking.

Verbose: If enabled, the Media Sequencer’s GPI handler outputs log information.

This information is useful for debugging.

Reversed Input Order: Note that this check box is only available if Box Type is set to SRC-8. If enabled, the signal line that originally triggered GPI action DL0/DH0 will now trigger GPI action DL7/DH7, the signal line that originally triggered GPI action

DL1/DH1 will now trigger GPI action DL6/DH6, and so on.

GPI action: Shows a list of the available GPI actions.

Commands and actions list:

Server/Client: Shows a drop-down list box in every row, where the selected GPI action should apply to either the Media Sequencer (Server option) or the local Viz

Trio client (Client option).

Note: The server and client actions are reciprocally exclusive.

Server Command: Shows a drop-down list box in every row, where the action to be performed on this GPI line can be selected. Server commands are GPI actions that apply to the Media Sequencer. When right-clicking an item in a

Create Playlist

or

Playlist Modes , a context menu opens. In this menu, select Set External Cursor. A

red arrow appears next to the selected element in the playlist, which indicates that this is the current GPI cursor. The server commands can be set to:

advance_and_take: The cursor shifts to the next element in the playlist, and then runs the Start operation.

take_and_advance: Runs the Start operation on the current element, and then shifts to the next element in the playlist.

take_current: Runs the Start operation on the current element (the element with the cursor).

next: Shifts to the next element in the playlist.

previous: Shifts to the previous element in the playlist.

continue: Runs the Continue operation on the current element.

out_current: Runs the Take Out operation on the current element.

Macro Command: Macro commands are silent GPI actions. Clicking the ellipsis (...) button opens the Add Command window.

Profile: Sets the profile to be used for the GPI action. This profile must match the profile set for the playlist that is to be triggered by the GPI actions. The drop-down list shows the profiles configured on the Media Sequencer.

Description: Shows the description of the GPI action, as it was specified in the Add

Command window.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 151

Viz Trio User’s Guide

This section contains information on the following topics:

To assign a Server Command

To assign a Client Command

To add a macro command

To assign a Server Command

1.

Select a GPI action, and select Server in the Server/Client column.

2.

Select a Server Command.

3.

Select a Profile.

4.

Click Apply.

To assign a Client Command

1.

Select a GPI action, and select Client in the Server/Client column.

2.

Select or create a Macro Command.

3.

Select a Profile.

4.

Click Apply.

To add a macro command

6.5.4

1.

Select the Macro Command column, and click the small ellipse (...) button to open the Add Command dialog box.

2.

Enter the command in the Command text field, or alternatively click the ellipse

(...) button to open the

Predefined Functions window.

See Also

Profile Setups

Video Disk Communication Protocol (VDCP)

To view the VDCP configuration settings, click Connectivity > VDCP in the Trio

Configuration.

Page 152 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

The Video Disk Control Protocol (VDCP) configuration allows a VDCP connection for

Media Sequencer to be established in order to externally control a Viz Pilot playlist or

Viz Trio show.

With VDCP the Media Sequencer acts like a server that controls the graphics through the VDCP protocol. It sets up a serial connection, and on the other end of the connection typically a video controller is placed. Over this connection VDCP commands are sent, and in this way the video controller is able to control a playlist/show.

The configuration of the Media Sequencer is twofold. There are the general VDCP settings, and there is the configuration for which playlist to control.

The VDCP protocol defines recommended serial settings, but if you for some reason need to use different settings please refer to the Media Sequencer manual’s VDCP section, and in particular the section on "Electrical and Mechanical Specifications", for information on how to configure this.

6.5.5

Port: Select the appropriate COM port for the communication.

Profile: Select the profile to use.

Select Mode: Select a Viz Trio show or a Viz Pilot playlist path mode.

Trio path / Pilot playlist: Sets the base directory for the VDCP integration. Video clips will be placed here.

MCU/AVS

To view the

MCU/AVS configuration settings , click Connectivity > MCU/AVS in the Trio

Configuration.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 153

MCU/AVS configuration settings

Viz Trio User’s Guide

This configuration is primarily used for configuring settings for a Newstar (News*) newsroom system connection.

Port: Select the appropriate Com port for the communication.

Baudrate: Select the appropriate baud rate.

Show path: Base directory for the MCU/AVS integration. Newsroom stories will be placed here.

Page 154

Range begin and Range end: Pages received from the newsroom system will be numbered within this range.

• Example: If Range Begin is 1000 and Range End is 5000 and Offset is 100. Then

Callup pages in story 1 will be numbered 1000, 1001, 1002, and so on. Callup pages in story 2 will be numbered 1100, 1101, 1102, and so on.

Offset: Sets the offset value that will be used to separate pages from different stores.

Verbose: Enables notification messages from the MCU/AVS driver. The messages will show on the Media Sequencer console. This feature is useful when setting up the system.

Replace delimiter: Replaces a character with the super-delimiter. For example if set to ‘|’. slashes ‘/’ can be put into tab-fields by entering ‘|’.

Super-delimiter: Delimiter used in News* to separate tab-fields. Standard value is

‘/’.

Ignore incorrect events: Incomplete scripts from News* will send invalid protocol data. Typically template specifications and supers could be missing. If this option is set to "Yes", then the system accepts incomplete/incorrect story descriptions.

Should be set to "Yes" in most cases.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.5.6

Unconditional deletes: Removed in version 1.10. On older versions of Viz Trio, this option should be enabled. This means that a transfer of messages from Newstar starts with deleting existing messages within the specified range. To maintain a proper state handling this method must be used.

Socket Object Settings

To view the

Socket Object configuration settings , click Connectivity > Socket Object

Settings in the Trio Configuration.

Socket Object configuration settings

The Socket Object Settings section allows for socket connections to be defined for the

Viz Trio client. It can either act as client or a server in a socket connection. A serial port connection which uses the same command set can also be set up.

Socket type:

Client socket: When Viz Trio is set up to be a client socket it will connect to the specified server socket. Specify a host name and a port for the machine that runs the server socket.

Server socket: When Viz Trio is set up to be a server socket it will wait for a client socket connection. Specify the port it should listen on.

Serial port (Com port): The serial port connections work in principle as a socket connection, but instead of using TCP/IP it uses a null modem cable. The command-set is the same.

Text encoding: Select a text encoding for the connection.

Serial port config: If a serial port connection is to be set up the COM port number and the data baud rate must be specified here.

Autoconnect: With this option set, a server socket or a serial port connection will be open/active at all times, but a client socket will first be active when data is sent.

If this option is not checked, a "connect_socket" command must be sent before sending the data.

Socket Host- The socket server’s host name must be set here if the Viz Trio client is to function as a client socket.

Socket Port: For client and server socket a port number must be specified here.

Data separator (escaped)- Specifies a data separator for incoming data.

• Receiving data separator will trigger the OnSocketDataReceived event in Scripts.

If unprintable ASCII characters are used as data separators, special character

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 155

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.5.7

sequences called "escape codes" are needed. All escape codes start with a backslash. For details, see

Escape Sequences .

• When the socket object receives the data separator, the OnSocketDataReceived event is triggered, and the data received since the last separator is issued

(not including the separator itself). If Data separator has no value, the

OnSocketDataReceived is called continuously as long as data is received.

Proxy

To view the

Proxy configuration settings

, click Connectivity > Proxy in the Trio

Configuration.

Proxy configuration settings

6.5.8

The proxy function is mostly relevant when Viz Trio and Viz Engine are set up with a direct network link to be controlled by an external control application. A dedicated network card on the Viz Trio client together with a crossed network cable directly to Viz is the normal way to make such a link.

All data sent over the configured listener port will be treated as Viz commands and forwarded by the Viz Trio client to Viz. With the proxy function enabled, the data sent over the configured listener port will be treated as Viz commands by the Viz Trio client.

Viz Trio does this by acting as a proxy transmitting commands back and forth between

Viz and the external control application.

Enabled: Enables the proxy feature.

Listen on port: Sets the listener port for Viz Trio that the sender will use.

Viz location (port host): Sets the listener port for Viz Engine and the hostname

(default is 6100 and localhost).

Viz One Configuration

To view the

Viz One connectivity settings , click Connectivity > Media Engine in the

Trio Configuration.

Page 156 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Viz One connectivity settings

The Media Sequencer’s communication with Viz One is related to all Media Sequencer show and playlist elements that contain Viz One elements residing on the Viz One that are initialized for playout.

Enable the Viz One handler: If selected, enables the Viz One handler.

Service document URI: Defines the Viz One instance to use.

Note: When the service document URI of the Viz One is changed, remember to manually change the Viz One storages for each video handler in the

Output

section of the configuration. A Viz One storage points to a Viz Engine where the

Viz One files are sent for playout. For more information, see To add a video device .

It is possible to define the Viz One server instance based on either an IP address or hostname. It is recommended to use hostname. Host comparisons in the system are generally done by string comparison, not by lookup. This is why either IP or hostname must be selected. This also means that you should not mix hostnames and fully qualified domain names; http://vizone01.vizrt.com/thirdparty is not the same as http://

vizone01/thirdparty, even if it is possible to ping both. The system allows using both

http and https, although http is recommended. Whatever options being selected (IP vs.

hostname, hostname vs. domain name, http vs. https), choose one or the other, and stick with it throughout the entire setup process.

Note: Viz One version 5.3 and later uses /api and not /thirdparty.

Username: Searches Viz One using the following Viz One username.

Password: Searches Viz One using the following Viz One password.

Viz Preview Server Host: Specify the host of the

Preview Server (hostname:port).

This service is used to generate preview graphics in the timeline editor. If the

ZeroConf service is installed and running, you can also select servers on the local network.

To configure a Viz One connection

1.

Make sure that the Enable the Viz One handler check box is selected.

2.

Type the hostname of the relevant Viz One in the Uri to service document box.

3.

Enter working login credentials in the Username and Password boxes.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 157

Viz Trio User’s Guide

If the Viz One configuration is successful, a green Viz One icon will appear in the

Status

Bar

.

Viz One error message

If the configuration is not working properly, the Viz One icon will be red. Scenarios where the icon is red can for example be a Viz One-search that fails, or a more serious error; a non-responsive Viz One with no video playout. In such serious situations where the Viz One is unavailable, the following Viz One error message will appear, stating that videos that have already been transferred to Viz will still work, but any new videos will not be transferred.

Page 158

See Also

Search Media

Viz One Administrator’s Guide

Viz One - Studio User’s Guide

To configure Viz One server time-out handling

In the event of a network failure or other unforeseen events the Trio client can be instructed by scripting to switch to a backup Viz One server. In order to prepare for this you should:

1.

Use the macro commands settings:set_mam_service_document_uri [uri [username

password]] and settings:set_media_search_credentials username password to instruct the switch to an alternate Viz One server.

2.

Update the active configuration (will also update the Media

Sequencer VDOM) with the new publishing point using the command:

channelcontrol:set_asset_storage <host-name> <storage-name>

3.

Make sure that the timeout value for the Media Sequencer VDOM value mam/

get_publishing_points_timeout is appropriate for your network environment.

By default it is 10000 (ms), i.e. 10 seconds. If the value is too low, the

settings:set_mam_service_document_uri command could possibly return with error without making the required change due to perhaps network glitches. Note that you will have to restart your Trio client for a change to this parameter to take effect.

In order to get or set the timeout value you can:

• Get the current value with: settings:get_setting mam/get_publishing_points_timeout

• Set the timeout with: settings:set_setting mam/get_publishing_points_timeout

[VALUE IN MS]. To allow for (max) 15 seconds : settings:set_setting mam/ get_publishing_points_timeout 15000

A basic switchover-script example: settings:set_mam_service_document_uri http://MyNewVizOneServer/api settings:set_media_search_credentials MyUserName MyPassword

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.6

channelcontrol:set_asset_storage MyNewVizOneServer The Video server

See Also

Macro Commands and Events

VizBoldsettings

Import/Export Settings

To view the

Import/Export configuration settings , click Import/Export Settings in the

Trio Configuration.

Import/Export configuration settings

The Import and Export Settings function is used to import and export the configuration settings from and to an XML-file. This allows customized settings to be applied to one or more Viz Trio clients without manually configuring the settings each time.

Export: Enables the export of Viz Trio settings and profile configurations to an XML file.

The following settings cannot be exported:

Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros settings (can be exported separately).

• Word replace settings under the

Text Editor

settings (can be exported separately).

Viz Pilot Database

settings.

• All

Connectivity

settings.

Import: Enables the import of Viz Trio settings and profile configurations from an XML file. Note that such an operation will overwrite existing settings and profiles, and that

Viz Trio must be restarted for the new configurations to take effect.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 159

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 160 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

7 Scripting

Scripts in Viz Trio can be stored in two ways; on the Media Sequencer on a per show basis, or as files on a drive (preferably shared). A show script is only accessible to the machines connected to the same Media Sequencer using the same show. Scripts can be assigned to templates and shows. Note that it is only possible to assign one script per show or template; however, you can include other scripts as part of the "main" script in order to extend its funtionality.

All edits to a script are carried out using the Viz Trio

Script Editor

. Changes made to a show script will only affect the selected show and those clients that control the same show. Changes made to a script file on a shared script repository will have an affect on all shows that use the same script.

Note: File scripts are read into the show each time a show is opened.

Only templates can have scripts assigned. All instances of a template will inherit the template script.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Viz Trio Scripting

Viz Template Wizard Scripting

See Also

Viz Graphic Hub

Macro Language

Macro Commands and Events

Tip: Always remember to escape backslashes correctly.

7.1

Viz Trio Scripting

In Viz Trio a VBScript can be attached to any show or template. This enables custom functionality to be implemented for that show or template. Typical applications for scripting can be import of data from database sources, guidance to users, and so on.

All template instances with a script will inherit the script.

Viz Trio supports a set of Macro Commands and Events

that may be used as part of the script.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Script Directory

Script Editor

Script Backup

It is recommended that scripts created for a specific show are saved with that show on the Media Sequencer. Thus, a backup of the Media Sequencer files is necessary.

Script Errors

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 161

Viz Trio User’s Guide

7.1.1

7.1.2

See Also

Template List

and the Script context menu options

Page List

and the Script context menu options

Viz Graphic Hub settings for local or shared script path configuration

• The

VizBolddblink

macro commands for use with scripting

Script Directory

All show scripts are stored on the Media Sequencer. However, a local directory is still needed for script files that are stored as files. Open the Configuration window, and set the Script Path under the

User Interface

/Paths section.

The default script directory is “%ProgramData%\Vizrt\Trio\scripts” normally C:

\ProgramData\Vizrt\Trio\scripts.

Note: Versions of Trio prior to 3.0 or higher stored scripts in C:\Program Files

(x86)\Vizrt\Viz Trio\scripts

Script Editor

Predefined Functions - Opens the

Predefined Functions window which contains a

set of

Commands

and Events that can be used in the script(s).

Show Library Scripts - Opens the

Library Scripts

window displaying scripts which can be attached to a template as a ‘USEUNIT reference.

Syntax check - Checks the syntax to verify that the it is correct.

Save script - Saves a script to the server. It is also possible to save the script by right-clicking within the script window and choose Save to repository from the

appearing Context Menu

. On this menu an option that lets units to be saved to a file can also be found.

Close unit - Closes the selected script unit.

Manage show scripts - Opens the Script Manager for the currently open show.

Close all units - Closes all script units.

Change font - Changes the font settings for the script editor.

Combo box - Jumps between script functions and procedures within the same script.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Context Menu

Shortcut Commands

Predefined Functions

Library Scripts

Script Manager

To assign a script to a show

To assign a script to a template

Page 162 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

To add a predefined function

To add a library script unit

To edit a show script

To edit a script

To execute a script

Context Menu

New edit window - Opens a new edit window.

Insert from file - Inserts script from file.

Load from file - Loads script from file in a new tab window.

Undo - Undoes latest change.

Redo - Redoes latest undo.

Select All - Selects the whole script.

Cut - Cuts selected text.

Copy - Copies selected text.

Paste - Pastes clipboard content.

Save to repository - Saves the script.

Toggle Bookmarks - This option toggles between inserting and removing a bookmark at/from the currently selected row.

Go to Bookmarks - Moves the cursor to the selected bookmark.

Find - Opens a search window. Search for text strings and expressions.

Replace - Opens a search and replace window. Search for a string to be replaced by another.

Use script unit - Opens a window with a list of accessible units. Select one to use with another script or script unit.

Print - Opens a print window.

Close unit - Closes the unit

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 163

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Manage show scripts - Opens a dialog box to allow for import, export, and deletion of script from a template.

Shortcut Commands

CTRL + TAB - Switches between the open scripting tabs.

CTRL + SPACE - Displays the Code Insight Window displaying a list of parameters, variables, functions, and so on available to the currently open script or in attached sub scripts.

CTRL + SHIFT + SPACE - Displays the code completion hints.

CTRL + Left mouse button - Opens the highlighted function (works across units).

This works across scripts and scripts units, but not within the same script. For this to work the script needs to add the USEUNIT <scriptname> notation in order to link the scripts together.

Predefined Functions

Almost all script functions in Viz Trio are macro

Commands

that can be wrapped in the TrioCmd("macro_command") format. The predefined functions window also makes

available a set of Events that can be added to the script(s).

Note that

TrioCmd() supports UTF16. If you need UTF8 support, you can use

TrioCmdUTF8().

Library Scripts

Script units can be added to an assigned template script. This opens up the possibility to write generic and specialized script units that are useful for more than one template.

When using script files a local or shared script path must be configured under the

Viz

Graphic Hub

settings.

Script Manager

Page 164

The Manage Show Scripts button opens a window where it is possible to import, export, and delete VBScript files from the current show.

To assign a script to a show

1.

Open the Show Properties .

2.

Click the browse button next to the Show Script field.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

3.

From the Choose Show Script window select either a file script (local or shared) or an Media Sequencer script.

4.

Click OK.

To assign a script to a template

1.

Right-click on a template and select Script > Assign script > New.

2.

Optional: Assign an existing script from the File or Show options.

3.

Enter a name for the script, and select to store the script on the Media Sequencer or to a local or shared script path (see

Viz Graphic Hub ).

4.

Click OK.

To add a predefined function

1.

Open a template with an assigned script.

2.

Click the Edit script button (see Controls

).

3.

Click the Predefined functions button in the Script Directory .

4.

Select a function, and click Add.

To add a library script unit

1.

Open a template with an assigned script.

2.

Click the Edit script button (see Controls

).

3.

Click the Library scripts button in the

Script Directory

.

4.

Select a script unit to use, and click OK.

To edit a show script

• Right click the Template list pane and from the appearing context menu select

Script and Edit Show Script.

To edit a script

• Open a template with an assigned script, and click the Edit Script button (see

Controls

).

To execute a script

7.1.3

• Open a template with an assigned script, and click the Execute Script button (see

Controls

).

Script Backup

It is recommended that scripts created for a specific show are saved with that show on the Media Sequencer. Thus, a backup of the Media Sequencer files is necessary. Script

Errors

If the script contains an error, the script window will automatically open highlighting the script error location. Additionally the script error is reported in the

Error Messages

Window .

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 165

Viz Trio User’s Guide

7.2

Viz Template Wizard Scripting

In Viz Trio, a Viz Template Wizard template can be used to further extend a show’s functionality.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Dynamically adding components

Set and get component values

Set and get show values

Dynamically adding components

Viz Trio has support for the

CreateVTWComponent function in Viz Template Wizard for dynamically adding components at run-time.

The following is an example where a text box and a button is used to generate a label at run-time.

curY = AddButton.Top + AddButton.Height + 5

Sub AddButtonClick(Sender)

lbl = CreateVTWComponent("TTWUniLabel", Sender.Parent)

lbl.Parent = Sender.Parent

lbl.Left = Sender.Left

lbl.Top = curY

curY = curY + lbl.Height + 2

SetUnicodeValue lbl, GetUnicodeValue(SampleEdit)End Sub

Set and get component values

Viz Trio has support for the

SetUnicodeValue and GetUnicodeValue functions in Viz

Template Wizard.

The following is an example of a text box being used to get and set a value in another text box without using TrioCmd.

Sub TWUniEdit1Change(Sender)

Text = GetUnicodeValue(TWUniEdit1)

SetUnicodeValue TWUniEdit2, Text

End Sub

Set and get show values

Using Viz Template Wizard to create standard templates for a show is quite useful as it enables the show to execute default commands for an entire show. It is therefore possible to set and get show values; however, there are some subtle differences in how to achieve both.

For example, when issuing a command such as

TrioCmd("page:read 1000") within a

Viz Template Wizard template, the page numbered 1000 will be read and previewed.

However, in order to return (get) values a command must be properly triggered by another event because all Viz Trio commands are queued; hence, the return value will be QUEUED. When a top-level command is executed (from the GUI or a macro) it is added to an internal queue and executed after other queued commands are finished.

Page 166 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

In order to get return values the code using

TrioCmd() must be issued by another toplevel command. In a VTW template this is achieved by adding Viz Trio commands to events.

Function OnMyButtonClick(Sender)

TrioCmd("page:read 1000")

TrioCmd("vtwtemplate:run_vtw_script GetDescription")

TrioCmd("page:read 1100")

...

End Function

Function GetDescription()

returnvalue = TrioCmd("page:getdescription")

msgbox returnvalue

End Function

In the above example the second command

vtwtemplate:run_vtw_script will be triggered within

GetDescription and return the description value.

See Also

Show Properties

and the Active VTW template setting

• Viz Template Wizard User’s Guide

• The

VizBolddblink

macro commands for use with scripting

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 167

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 168 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

8 Macro Language

With the Viz Trio macro language it is possible to script many of the operations that are normally done in the graphical user interface. The general syntax is:

Command [argument]

Some commands take several arguments, for instance the command scaling that must have both the x-, y- and z-axis specified. See the command list for reference.

Macro commands can be used in three ways: As part of a shortcut key using the

Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros

window, as part of a script using the

Script Editor

or as part of an external application where commands are executed over a socket connection.

When macros are used, it is often desirable to use commands that normally would trigger a dialog for user input such as page:delete 1000. The latter example would normally ask a user to confirm whether to delete the page or not. To avoid this issue it is possible to set the following modes:

gui:set_silent_mode - Sets silent mode which controls whether to show dialogs to the user or not.

gui:set_interactive_mode - Sets interactive mode which controls whether to show dialogs to the user or not.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Working with Macro Commands

Working with Macro Commands over a Socket Connection

Working with Shortcut Keys

See Also

Scripting

Macro Commands and Events

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 169

8.1

Working with Macro Commands

Trio Client Commands window

Viz Trio User’s Guide

8.1.1

The Viz Trio user interface basically uses the same macro commands as the scripting support uses. To help find the commands that are executed when different user interface operations are performed, use the commands window and look at which commands are sent.

The actual commands are what can be seen after the colon.

page:read 1000

The Trio Client Commands window can be very helpful when learning the system and the macro commands. Enter commands in the text field at the bottom. Use this to test a customized command, and click the Execute button to run it.

To enable the Trio Client Commands button

• Click Viz Trio’s Config button, and in the User Interface > User Restictions section, clear the Call Viz Trio Commands check box.

To open the Trio Client Commands window

• Click the Trio Commands button in the lower-right corner of the application window.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Apropos and Help Commands

Show, Context and Tab-field Commands

Apropos and Help Commands

The Trio Client Commands window has some features that is helpful when searching for information about a command.

The keywords apropos and help can be used to do lookups in the available set of commands.

apropos - Searches command names and descriptions for a string.

Page 170 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

help - Shows help for the specified command, or lists commands.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Example I: Apropos

Example II: Help

Example I: Apropos

COMMAND: main:apropos context_variable

RESULT: show:get_context_variable(string variable) : Get the showcontext-variable.

show:set_context_variable(string variable, restString value) : Set the

show-variant to a new value.

Example II: Help

8.1.2

COMMAND: main:help read_template

RESULT: Parameters: (string templateid) Description: Read a template if

concepts and variants are enabled. If not, read a normal template.

Show, Context and Tab-field Commands

Show variables are global variables as all variables are stored on the Media Sequencer.

Meaning that all Viz Trio applications using the same Media Sequencer can set and get the variables, and any script within a show can access the variable.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Show Variables

Concept, Context and Variant Variables

Commands

Tab-field Variables

See Also

Macro Commands and Events

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 171

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Show Variables

Page 172

Use the Trio Client Commands window to set show variables. The variables can be used by scripts as a means of storing intermediate values such as counters.

Commands:

• show:set_variable - Set the value of a show variable

• show:get_variable - Get the value of a show variable

Example commands:

COMMAND: show:set_variable MyShowVar Hello World!

COMMAND: show:get_variable MyShowVar

RESULT: Hello World!

Script example:

Sub OnUserClick()

dim myLocalShowVar

myLocalShowVar = TrioCmd("show:get_variable MyShowVar")

MsgBox("Variable value is: " & myLocalShowVar)

myLocalShowVar = InputBox("Enter a new Value:","New Value")

TrioCmd("show:set_variable MyShowVar " & myLocalShowVar)

End Sub

Concept, Context and Variant Variables

Use the Trio Client Commands window to set context variables. Context variables are

different than Show Variables

as context variables are used to select the context a page is taken on-air with. The following contexts are available to Viz Trio users:

Concept - A concept can be News or Sports or any other concept. Graphics in the same concept are created as individual scenes belonging to a specific concept.

Variant - A concept can have different variants of the same scene. This can be a scene with the same tab-fields, but displayed as a top or lower third.

Context - Additional user-defined contexts can be used to further differentiate a concept and its variants. For example the context Platform could have SD, HD,

Mobile phones, web and so on defined within the concepts News and Sport.

Commands

If a concept, context or variant for a show is set using one of the show commands, for example show:set_variant top, this will override the selection done in the page list’s user interface, marking the variant with square brackets. Issuing the same command, without the variant name (show:set_variant ) resets the variant to the initial selection done using the page list user interface.

Note: A get command cannot retrieve a variable’s value if not a set command is issued first.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Available commands:

show:enable_context() - Enables concept and variant for the current show. This will also separate templates and pages into their own lists.

show:set_concept(restString concept) - Sets the show’s concept to a new value.

show:get_concept() - Gets the show’s concept if set by a set command.

show:set_context_variable (string variable, restString value) - Sets the show’s context to a new value.

show:get_context_variable (string variable) - Gets the show’s context variable if set by a set command.

show:set_variant (restString variant) - Sets the show’s variant to a new value.

show:get_variant() - Get the show’s variant if set by a set command.

playlist:set_concept(string value) - Sets the concept for a show playlist.

Note: The set_variant and get_variant commands are aliases for the context commands when setting and getting variants, and are not applicable for other contexts.

Example commands:

COMMAND: show:set_context_variable concept Sport

COMMAND: show:set_context_variable variant Lower

COMMAND: show:set_context_variable platform HD

COMMAND: show:get_context_variable concept

RESULT: Sport

COMMAND: show:get_context_variable variant

RESULT: Lower

COMMAND: show:get_context_variable <contextname>

RESULT: HD

A parameter must be set using the commands, before it can be shown using the commands. An output will normally differ depending on the scene design, therefore not all the output is shown.

IMPORTANT! Command parameters are case sensitive.

Tab-field Variables

Use the Viz Trio’s commands window to set custom properties for tab-fields. The property can be used for scripting to set intermediate properties for tab-fields.

Commands:

• set_custom_property (string tabfieldName, string value)

• get_custom_property (string tabfieldName)

Example commands:

COMMAND: tabfield:set_custom_property 01 string

COMMAND: tabfield:get_custom_property 01

RESULT: string

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 173

Viz Trio User’s Guide

8.2

8.2.1

Working with Macro Commands over a Socket Connection

Viz Trio can be controlled using custom made control applications over a TCP/IP socket connection on port 6200. This feature gives the possibility to use macro commands that can trigger actions in Viz Trio.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Sending Macro Commands

Unicode Support

Escape Sequences

Error Messages

See Also

Commands

Sending Macro Commands

This section gives a quick overview of how to establish a connection with Viz Trio over a socket connection in order to send Macro Commands to control Viz Trio. The following procedures will use Telnet as an example.

This section contains information on the following topics:

To configure Viz Trio for socket connections

To connect to Viz Trio using telnet

To send commands to Viz Trio using telnet

To enable telnet for Windows 7

To configure Viz Trio for socket connections

1.

Open the Configuration Interface

and select Socket Object Settings

.

2.

In the appering pane set the following:

• Set Socket type to Server socket

• Set Text encoding to UTF-8

• Check Autoconnect and set Socket Host to localhost and Socket Port to 6200.

3.

Click OK.

To connect to Viz Trio using telnet

1.

Open Telnet by clicking the Start button, typing Telnet in the Search box, and then clicking OK.

2.

Type telnet localhost 6200 and press Enter.

Note: Windows 7 users must turn on Telnet as it is by default turned off.

To send commands to Viz Trio using telnet

1.

Create a page in Viz Trio with the page number 1000.

2.

Open a telnet connection to Viz Trio, type

page:read 1000 and press Enter.

Page 174 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

8.2.2

8.2.3

To enable telnet for Windows 7

1.

Click the Start button, click Control Panel, click Programs, and then click Turn

Windows features on or off. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.

2.

In the Windows Features dialog box, select the Telnet Client check box.

3.

Click OK. The installation might take several minutes.

Unicode Support

Commands that can set and get text values (such as set_value and getproperty) supports the full set of Unicode characters. The internal format is UTF-16 (WideString).

However, when communicating with Viz Trio over a socket connection on port 6200, an

8-bit string must be used, and the default (and preferred) encoding is therefore UTF-8.

It is also possible to use latin1 (ISO-8859-1, western european) encoding.

To toggle the socket encoding

• To toggle the socket encoding, send one of the following commands to the socket:

socket_encoding latin1 or socket_encoding utf8.

Note: The socket_encoding command is not a macro command, and can only be used with socket communication.

See Also

VizBoldsock commands

Escape Sequences

A socket command is terminated by a new line. To support setting and getting multiline parameters and results, some characters have to be escaped; that is, represented by sequences of other characters. Backslash (\) is used as the escape character for socket commands.

See the table below for currently supported escape sequences.

Escape Sequences

Escape Sequence Meaning

\n New line

\r Carriage return

\xHH

\

Two-digit hexadecimal character code.

Back slash (\)

8.2.4

Error Messages

When controlling Viz Trio over a socket connection you can enable error messages using the commandserver command.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 175

Viz Trio User’s Guide

8.3

commandserver:enable_error_messages true commandserver:enable_error_messages false

Note: Typing

commandserver is optional

Enabling error messages will send error messages to the connected client as well as being displayed in the GUI (on a per socket connection). The client will receive all error messages that is normally just displayed in the Viz Trio user interface.

Note that not only the error messages generated by the client will be sent - all errors will be sent. For example an operator using Viz Trio at the same time and tries to read a non-existing page will result in error messages being sent to all clients connected over a socket connection.

Errors have this format:

ERROR: <Error message>

If error handling is turned off, the client will still get errors caused by commands not being found and commands that return an error.

This command is only implemented for the command server on port 6200, and is not related to the

Socket Object Settings in the

Configuration Interface .

Working with Shortcut Keys

Viz Trio allows you to assign macro commands and scripts to shortcut keys; however, there are two ways of doing this; On a per show or global basis. Shortcut keys assigned on a global level are assigned through the

Configuration Interface , whereas show

specific shortcut keys are assigned through the

Show Properties .

This section contains information on the following topics:

To assign a macro or script to a shortcut key

To reassign a shortcut key

To remove a shortcut key

To add a predefined function to a Macro or Script

To assign a macro or script to a shortcut key

1.

Click the Add Macro or Add Script button.

The Macro Commands editor will open:

Page 176 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

2.

Select the keyboard keys for the shortcut (e.g. combinations of CTRL, SHIFT, ALT,

ALT GR with other characters).

• If the selected shortcut key is already in use you may override it, removing it from the other macro or script.

3.

Enter a Macro or Script Name and Description of the macro orscript.

• If the macro name is already in use, the Save as New button appears.

4.

Add the macro or script commands to the Macro or Script text area.

5.

Click OK to confirm the selected key combination.

To reassign a shortcut key

• Double-click the Command in the list and perform the changes.

To remove a shortcut key

1.

Right-click a Macro or Script that has been manually added and from the appearing context menu select Remove, or

2.

Select a Macro or Script and click the Remove button, or

3.

Select a Macro or Script and press the Delete button on the keyboard.

To add a predefined function to a Macro or Script

1.

Open a Macro or Script for editing.

2.

Click the Show Macros ... button in the Macro Commands editor to open a list of predefined functions.

3.

Select the function and click Add

Note: Predefined macro commands can also be applied to scripts.

See Also

Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros

Macro Commands and Events

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 177

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 178 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

9 Macro Commands and Events

This section contains reference information on the following topics:

Commands

Events

See Also

Scripting

Macro Language

9.1

Commands

The commands are grouped as follows:

VizBoldchannelcontrol

VizBolddblink

VizBoldgui

VizBoldmacro

VizBoldmain

VizBoldpage

VizBoldplaylist

VizBoldproxy

VizBoldrundown

VizBoldscript

VizBoldscroll2

VizBoldsettings

VizBoldshow

VizBoldsock

VizBoldtabfield

VizBoldtable

VizBoldtext

VizBoldtrio

VizBoldutil

VizBoldviz

VizBoldvtwtemplate

channelcontrol

Command name and Arguments Description

add_channel

(restString channelName)

Adds a new channel to the active profile. The named channel must not exist.

get_active_profile Returns the name of the active profile.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 179

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 180 get_preview_channel get_program_channel get_video_preview_channel

Gets the name of the currently configured Viz program channel. Returns an empty string if no

Viz program channel is defined.

Gets the name of the currently configured video preview channel. Returns an empty string if no video preview channel is defined.

get_video_program_channel(restString channelName) @TODO check args

Gets the name of the currently configured video program channel. Returns an empty string if no video program channel is defined.

list_profiles

Gets the name of the currently configured Viz preview channel. Returns an empty string if no

Viz preview channel is defined.

list_video_channels list_viz_channels remove_channel

(restString channelName)

Returns a list of existing profiles, separated by line breaks.

Returns all video channels of the current profile as comma separated list.

Returns all Viz channels of the current profile as comma separated list.

Removes the channel with the given name from the active profile. The channel name must be valid.

set_active_profile

(restString profileName)

Change the active channel profile.

set_asset_storage (string host-name, restString storage-name)

Sets the publishing point to be used for all handlers in the active profile. The storage name is the user visible title for the asset storage.

set_channel_hosts

(string channelname, restString hostlist) set_preview_channel

(restString channelName)

Changes the list of Viz hosts for a channel. The referenced channel must exist. The list of hosts can be space/comma/semi-colon separated.

set_program_channel

(restString channelName)

Changes the Viz preview channel. The channel name must be valid. If empty the Viz preview channel will be undefined.

Changes the Viz program channel. The channel name must be valid. If empty the Viz program channel will be undefined.

set_video_channel_hosts(string channelname, restString hostlist)

Changes the list of video hosts for a channel.

The referenced channel must exist. The list of hosts can be space/comma/semi-colon separated.

set_video_preview_channel(restString channelName)

Changes the video preview channel. The channel name must be valid. If empty the video preview channel will be undefined.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide set_video_program_channel(restString channelName)

Changes the video program channel. The channel name must be valid. If empty the video program channel will be undefined.

wait_vizcmd_to_channel

(string channel, restString cmd)

Sends a Viz Engine command to a named channel and waits for the returned answer.

dblink

Command name and Arguments Description

link_database (string property key, string connection name, string table name)

Links a property of a page to a table of a database connection.

Example 1:

TrioCmd("dblink:link_database

1 ExcelTest ""['Scalar Tests$']""")

Example 2:

TrioCmd("dblink:link_database

1 ExcelTest ""['Table Tests$']""")

1 refers to the Control List, Chart or Text’s Field

Identifier that in Viz Trio can be identified as the template’s tab field 1.

ExcelTest refers to the name of the configured database connection made in the

Database Config window. (See

To create a new database connection

).

Scalar Tests and Table Tests refers to the table that is chosen in order to select the lookup column.

map_database_column (string table key, string property column key, string database field name) select_value (string property key, string value column, string key column, string key value)

Maps a column of a table property to a database field.

Example:

TrioCmd

("dblink:map_database_column 1 3 Name").

1 refers to the Control List’s or Control Chart’s

Field identifier property that in Viz Trio can be identified as the template’s tab field 1.

3 refers to the Control Text Field identifiers in the scene that make out column number 3 that in Viz Trio can be identified as the table column in the page editor.

Name refers to the column the data should be read from.

Selects a single value (scalar linking) of a database and links it to the property. The value is selected from the <value column> where the <key column> matches the <key value>.

Example:

TrioCmd("dblink:select_value 1

Color Key 2")

1 refers to the Control Text’s Field identifier property that in Viz Trio can be identified as the template’s tab field 1.

Color refers to the column the data should be read from.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 181

Page 182

Viz Trio User’s Guide store_to_database (string property key) update_from_database (string property key)

Key refers to the lookup column defined in the

Database Config window. (See

To create a new database connection

).

2 refers to the row the data should be read from.

Stores a linked property of a page to its value in the database.

Example:

TrioCmd("dblink:store_to_database 1")

1 refers to the Control Text’s Field identifier property that in Viz Trio can be identified as the template’s tab field 1.

Updates a linked property of a page with its value in the database.

Example:

TrioCmd("dblink:update_from_database

1")

1 refers to the Control Text’s Field identifier property that in Viz Trio can be identified as the template’s tab field 1.

use_custom_sql (string property key, restString custom SQL)

Uses a custom SQL clause to select the database value. An empty SQL clause disables the usage of custom SQL.

Example:

TrioCmd("dblink:use_custom_sql

1 SELECT Text FROM ['Table Tests$']")

1 refers to the Control List’s or Control Chart’s

Field identifier property that in Viz Trio can be identified as the template’s tab field 1.

Text refers to the column the data should be read from.

Table Tests refers to the database table (i.e.

a single spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel).

gui

Command name and Arguments Description

add_view (title min max elementTypeList)

Creates a new view. If called without any parameters, the PageView dialog will be shown.

Min and max may optionally be specified to filter elements with numeric names. Elements with non-numeric names will always be included.

elementTypeList is an optional space-separated list of types of elements to include in the view. Possible values are: pages stills videos empty_groups. If none are specified, all will be included.

Example 1: gui:add_view "The Title" 2000 3500 pages stills. This will show pages and stills in

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide artist_mode browse_image change_path clear_page_field copy_selected_pages_to_number

(restString destnumber) copy_selected_pages_with_offset

(restString destnumber) create_new_show the range between 2000 and 3500. Videos will not be shown and empty groups will be hidden.

Example 2: gui:add_view title2 videos. This will show all videos, nothing else.

Enter design mode (Viz Artist).

Browse local file system for images.

Shows the directory selector.

Clears the content of the page edit’s text field.

Copy the selected pages to number or show a dialog if no number is supplied.

Copy the selected pages with an offset or show a dialog if no number is supplied.

design_mode edit_begin_time edit_end_time

Create a new show in the currently selected directory. A unique name is generated and the new show path is returned.

Enter Trio design mode.

Shows the in place editor for the selected page.

Shows the in place editor for the selected page.

edit_group_name edit_page_description edit_page_program_channel edit_scroll edit_template

(restString templateName)

Shows the in place editor for the selected page.

Shows the in place editor for the selected page.

Shows the in place editor for the selected page.

Show the scroll editor.

Edit the specified template in a dialog. This only works for templates in concept-enabled shows.

error_message (restString message) Display an error message in the status bar. The message will also be logged.

find focus_active_view

Shows the find dialog.

Set the keyboard focus to the active page view.

focus_next_view focus_prev_focused_view

Activate the next page view

Focus the previous focused view.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 183

Page 184

Viz Trio User’s Guide focus_prev_view get_callup_code get_selected_pages

Activate the previous page view

Gets the value of the callup code window.

Retrieves the currently selected pages as a space separated list.

goto_config hide_timecode_monitor

Opens Viz Trio’s

Configuration Interface

.

Hides the TimeCode monitor. See also

show_timecode_monitor

.

Test if a tab field exists on the X,Y coordinate.

hit_test

(x:integer, y:integer) load_image_from_viz Show the viz image browser for the current tab field.

Add a message to the logfile.

log_message

(restString message) move_selected_pages_to_number

(restString destnumber) move_selected_pages_with_offset

(restString destnumber) open_playlists

Move the selected pages to number or show a dialog if no number is supplied.

Move the selected pages with an offset or show a dialog if no number is supplied.

open_effect_dialog play_video playout_mode post_render

Shows the directory selector for the external playlists. Typically MOS playlists.

This command opens the effect dialog. Will not open if current page is not set.

Play video in video preview

Enter playout mode.

Opens the post render editor.

prepare_snapshot print_selected_pages read_page_following_last_taken

Open the prepare snapshot editor.

Print the selected pages in the active view.

Read the page succeeding the page that was last taken.

reimport_selected_pages search_video (restString search_text

(optional video id)) select_last_taken_page select_nextpage

Reimport the selected pages in the active view.

Search for video.

Select the page that was last taken.

Select the next page in the active view.

select_prevpage Select the previous page in the active view.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide set_autopreview

(boolean autopreview) set_bounding_box

(visible:boolean)

Sets the auto-preview state (single-click read) for page views.

Toggles the bounding boxes for the elements in the preview (same as the BB button).

set_column_visible

(string columnname, boolean active)

Sets the visiblity of the column. Applies to all pageviews.

set_focus_to_editor set_font (restString fontname) set_interactive_mode

(boolean active) set_run_script_button_enabled

(boolean IsEnabled)

Sets focus to the currently active tab field editor.

Set the default GUI font

Sets interactive mode which controls whether to show dialogs to the user or not.

Sets the run script button to enabled/disabled.

set_safearea

(visible:boolean) set_silent_mode

(boolean active) set_statusbar_color

(int R, int G, int B) set_titlearea

(visible:boolean) set_mam_service_document_uri [uri

[username password]]

Toggle safe area.

Sets silent mode which controls whether to show dialogs to the user or not.

Sets the color of the statusbar based on the

RBG values given.

Toggles the title area in the preview window.

set_media_search_credentials username password show_viz_preview show_custom_prop_column

(boolean value) show_export_dialog show_external_cursor

(boolean value) show_feed_streamer_moderation

The parameters are optional. If no parameters are provided the command should disable the

Viz One configuration. Otherwise it enables the configuration if necessary and sets the new

URI and possibly also the credentials if those parameters are provided.

This command changes the credentials used for when doing media searches on Viz One.

Show Viz preview

Shows or hides custom property column in tab field list.

Show the export show dialog.

Show or hide the external cursor in the page view.

show_import_dialog

Opens the feed streamer moderation tool if Viz

SocialTV is installed.

Show the import show dialog.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 185

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 186 show_pageeditor show_pages_in_rundown

(boolean doShow) show_pageview

Shows the page editor.

Shows or hides pages in the rundown for the current show.

Show the page view.

show_playlist (string refPath, boolean requestMos, restString description)

Shows the playlist with the specified path or name. Can choose to request a MOS playlist.

Description is optional and defaults to the playlist name.

show_scripteditor show_scroll_template_creator show_settings show_search_media show_search_video show_shortcut_list show_showscript_editor show_status_icons

(boolean value) show_templates_in_rundown

(boolean doShow) show_timecode_monitor show_triocommands status_message

(restString message) take_callup

Shows the script editor.

Shows the scroll template creator view.

Open the show properties view

Shows the search media view.

Shows the search video view.

Show the view of local shortcuts and macros.

Shows the show script editor.

Shows or hides status cells in the callup grid.

Shows or hides templates in the rundown for the current show.

Shows the TimeCode Monitor. See also

hide_timecode_monitor .

Toggles the Trio Commands window.

Display a text message in the status bar. The message will also be logged.

Take the current callup number directly, without a read.

Takes snapshot from the specified handler in

RGB format.

take_snapshot

(string path, string handlerName) take_snapshot_rgba

(string path, string handlerName) toggle_design_mode toggle_error_message_window toggle_hide_nameless_groups

(visible:boolean)

Takes snapshot from the specified handler in

RGBA format.

Toggle between Trio design and playout mode.

Toggle the visibility of the error message window.

Toggle hide/show groups with no name.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

macro

Command name and Arguments Description

export_macros_to_xml

(string filename)

Exports the macro commands to a XML file.

main

Command name and Arguments Description

apropos

(search:string)

Search command names and descriptions for a string.

call_macro

(restString name) define_local_macro

(string name, restString commands) define_local_script

(string name, restString commands) define_macro

(string name, restString commands) define_script

(string name, restString commands) delete_global_macro

(name:string)

Call (invoke) a named macro.

Define a named, local macro.

Define a named, local script.

Define a named, global macro.

Define a named, global script.

Delete a global macro.

delete_local_macro

(name:string) get_global_macros

Delete a local macro.

get_local_macros get_shows get_version help

(command:string) macro

List the names of global macros (separated by new lines).

List the names of local macros (separated by new lines).

Get the names of all the shows in the client

Get a version string.

Shows help for the specified command, or lists commands.

page

Command name and Arguments Description

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 187

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 188 arm

(pageName:string, channelName: string) arm_current

(channelName:string) arm_selected cancel_refresh_linked_data

(page name (optional)) change_channel

("string FromChannel, string

ToChannel, boolean All) change_description

(string pageNr, restString desc) change_template

(string templateName)

Arms the specified page on the specified channel. If channelName is empty, the default channel is used.

Arms the currently read page on its specified program channel. If channelName is empty, the default channel is used.

Arm the selected page.

Cancel refreshing of linked data, started with the 'page:refresh_linked_data_async' command.

Switch from "FromChannel" to "ToChannel".

"All" will change all elements using

"FromChannel".

Sets the page description.

Changes the template of the selected pages.

Empty parameter("") will take the number in the callup field and use that as the template

ID.

Changes the template of the given pages.

change_template_for_pages

(string templateName, restString pages) change_thumbnail_uri

(string pageName, restString newThumbnailURI) change_variable

(string variable, restString value) continue

(restString pageNr) cue

(restString pageNr) cue_append

(pageNr:string) cut

(pageNr:integer) delete_page delete_pagerange

(int start, int end)

Changes the thumbnail URI for the referenced page. The URI and the page name must be valid.

Change the variant for the currently edited page.

Only applicaple to videos. Continues the video specified as parameter or the currently read video if the parameter is empty.

Cues the page specified as parameter or the selected if the parameter is empty.

Only applicaple to videos. Cues the video after the currently playing video. Specify a page as parameter or no parameter for the currently read video.

Cuts the current template or page or the page specified.

Delete selected page(s) in active view.

Deletes the page inside from the begin range to (including) the end range parameter.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide direct_continue direct_cut

Continue selected page in active view.

Cut selected page in active view.

direct_take direct_takeout direct_cue direct_cue_append direct_pause

Take selected page in active view.

Take out selected page in active view.

Cue the selected video on the video program channel

Cue append the selected video on the video program channel

Pause the currently playing video on the video program channel

Export a property value to file (UTF-8 encoded).

export_property

(string key, string filename) fire

(channelName:string, action:string, clearAfterFire:boolean)

Fire a channel with the given action (take, continue, out, and so on). If clearAfterFire is true, the armed element on the channel is unarmed after fire.

fire_all

(action:string, clearAfterFire:boolean)

Fire all armed channels with the given action (take, continue, out, and so on). If clearAfterFire is true, the armed elements on the channels are un-armed after fire.

get_current_propertykey get_current_tabfield_name get_layers

(string page)

Get the current property-key.

Get the name of the current tab field.

Will get the layer name(s) the combination or transition logic page is based on, hence, this command is not valid for pages based on standalone scenes (returns an empty string).

Gets the program channel for the page.

get_program_pagechannel

(restString pageid) get_property

(string name) get_tabfield_names ( optional: pageName)

Get the value of the specified tabfield property.

get_tabfield_count get_template_description

(string page)

Retrieves the tab-field names of the given page or the current page if no page is specified. The returned list is space separated.

Gets the number of tabfield on the current page.

Gets the template description for the page specified.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 189

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 190 get_viz_layer

(restString page) getpagedescription getpagename get_property_keys ([pageName optional])

Gets the viz layer for a page. If no page name is supplied, current page is used. Only valid for scene-based pages.

Get the description of the current page.

Get the name of the current page.

Retrieves the property keys of the given page or the current page if no page is specified. The returned list is space separated.

Get the template of the current page.

Import a property value from file (UTF-8 encoded).

getpagetemplate import_property

(string key, string filename) load_page_data

(filename:string (optional)) pause

(pageNr:string) prepare

(pageNr:string) print

Load page data from XML.

Only applicable to videos. Pauses the video.

Specify a page as parameter or no parameter for the currently read video.

Prepares the page specified as parameter or the currently read if the parameter is empty.

Print the current page. Use settings printer/ left_margin, printer/right_margin, printer/ top_margin, printer/bottom_margin to control the size, where the value is the percent of the page width/height.

Reads the specified page number.

read

(pageNr:integer) read_parentpage read_rootpage

Read the parent of a sub page.

Read the root page in a page hierarchy.

read_subpage

(string string) read_template

(string templateid)

Read a sub page of another page, for instance a scroll element. Argument format: "tabfield key/pagenumber", eg. "1/1003".

Reads a template if concepts and variants are enabled. If not, read a normal template.

read_template_with_context

(string template, string contextPairs)

Read a master template with context variables that can override the show properties. The context is given a whitespace-separated list of keys and values.

readnext readprevious

Read next element in active view.

Read previous element in active view.

redo Redo edit in current page history.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide refresh_linked_data

(page name (optional)) refresh_linked_data_async

(page name (optional))

Refresh linked data if the page has any tabfields that are linked to data from an external source.

Start refreshing linked data if the page has any tabfields that are linked to data from an external source. The refresh can be cancelled with the 'page:cancel_refresh_linked_data' command.

(string command, string channel, restString variables) save save_page_data

(filename:string (optional), version:string (optional, defaults to

2.6)) save_scene saveas

([pageNr:integer]) page with variables to a specific channel.

Saves current page.

Save page data as XML in specified version

(2.5 or 2.6).

set_effect

(restString effect) set_effect_on_selected

(string effect) set_expert_mode_enabled

(boolean enabled) set_pagestatus

(status: string) set_pagestatus_one

(pagenr: integer, status: string) set_pagetime

(string pageid, string type, string value) set_program_pagechannel

Save current page as a new Viz scene.

Goes in saveas mode or saves page to page given as argument. Triggers the save as action for a template or page, saving it with the page number as parameter. If no parameter is given, the callup code will be set to the next page number available; however, the page will not be saved.

Sets the transition effect to be used between

(scene-based) pages. Empty string specifies hard cuts (default).

Sets the transition effect to be used between

(scene-based) pages on the currently selected one. Empty string specifies hard cuts (default).

Enable or disable "expert mode" for the current page. This enables all tab field properties to be accessed instead of a filtered subset. Restarting Trio will reset expert mode.

Set the status of the selected pages. Valid arguments: FINISHED/UNFINISHED/NONE.

Set the status of page. Valid status arguments:

FINISHED/UNFINISHED/NONE.

Sets the begin/end time for the page specified.

Sets the program channel for the page.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 191

Page 192

Viz Trio User’s Guide

(string pageid, restString channelname) set_property

(string name, restString value) setpagetemplate

(string templateName) store tab tab_backwards tabto

(tabfieldnr:integer) tabtotabfield

(tabfieldname:string) take

(pageNr:integer) take_exchange take_with_variables

(restString variables) take_with_variables_on_channel takenext takeout

(pageNr:integer) unarm

(channelName:string) unarm_current unarm_all undo update update_preview

Set the value of a named tab field property.

Change the template of the current page.

Save the page with the name given in the read page edit field (the left one).

Tab to the next tab field.

Tab to the previous tab field.

Go to a specific tab-field number.

Go to a specific tab-field number.

Does a take on the current template or page or on page specified.

Take current page and read the last page that was taken.

Take a page with variables.

Take a page with variables to a specific channel.

Take current page and read next page in active view.

Take out current template or page or template or page specified.

Unarms the specified channel.

Unarms the currently read page on the channel it is armed.

Un-arms all armed pages.

Undo edit in current page history.

Update the program renderer (do a take without animating it in).

Update the external preview renderer with the contents of the local preview.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

playlist

Command name and Arguments Description

add_page

(string pagename, restString duration)

Add a page to the end of the playlist. The duration argument is optional. If not given, the page duration will be used.

create_playlist

(string name) close (restString: id)

Adds a new empty global playlist and returns the path to the new playlist. The name of the playlist is optional. If not specified, a dialog will pop up to ask for it. The new playlist will show up in the "playlists" in the "Change Show" dialog.

Closes a specified playlist. The id parameter is either the path or the unique identifier of the playlist to close. If omitted the current playlist is closed.

copy_to_show (restString start_num) Copy the elements in the playlist to the current show clear (restString id) Clears the specified playlist. The id can be the playlist path or its identifier. If omitted the current playlist gets cleared.

direct_take_out_selected direct_take_selected

Take out the currently selected playlist element.

Take the selected playlist item onair without previewing it.

get_current get_playlists

Retrieves the path of the playlist which is the current one. May return an empty string.

Retrieves the a list of all open playlists in the current show as space separated list of playlist references which can be used to refer to playlists in other commands like playlist:set_current.

go_to_next_story go_to_previous_story goto_manual_graphics_mode

(restString enable) initialize_playlist jump_to_ncs_cursor

Select the next story (group) in the active playlist.

Select the previous story (group) in the active playlist.

Enable/disable manual playout of graphic elements. Use "true" or "" for manual and

"false" for automatic mode.

Initialize the playlist (load graphics) on the external output channels.

Jump to the element that the NCS-cursor

(newsroom control system) is pointing to.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 193

Page 194

Viz Trio User’s Guide pause_carousel read_next_item read_prev_item read_selected reload_thumbnails (restString: template_names) run_selected_with_custom_action

(string Action) select_first select_next select_next_by_description

(restString phrase) set_current (string: id) select_previous set_attribute_on_selected

(string attribute, restString value) set_concept

(string value) set_filter (restString: filerName)

Pause the carousel.

Read the next playlist item.

Read the previous playlist item.

Read the currently selected playlist element.

Reload the thumbnails for the given templates on all open playlists. Reloads all thumbnails if no templates are given.

This macro command is generic and can append any Media Sequencer command as a parameter for playing out selected graphics and/or video clip elements in any playlist.

Example:

playlist:run_selected_with_custom_action

"prepare" playlist:run_selected_with_custom_action

"take"

Note that if you have a version of the Media

Sequencer that is newer than the version released with your version of Viz Trio, you can still use new commands supported by the Media Sequencer by using this macro command.

Select the first element in the playlist.

Select the next element in the active playlist.

Selects the next element in the active playlist which has the given phrase in its description.

Defines the specified playlist as the current one for operations like add_item. The id can be the playlist path or its identifier.

Select the previous element in the active playlist.

Sets an attribute on all the selected items in a playlist.

Set the concept for a show.

set_looping

(restString looping TRUE or FALSE)

Set the filter of the currently active playlist.

The filter must already exist. Calling with no filter name will reset the filter of the playlist.

Set to true if the carousel shall be looping.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide start_carousel (playlist name or id

(optional, defaults to active playlist))

Run the elements in the playlist as a carousel.

stop_carousel (playlist name or id

(optional, defaults to active playlist))

Stop a playlist running as a carousel.

proxy

Command name and Arguments Description

enable_viz_proxy

(boolean enable)

Enables/disables Trio acting as a Viz Proxy on the port configured.

set_proxy_port

(int port)

Set the port that Trio should listen on.

set_viz_host

(string host) set_viz_port

(int port)

Set the host where the proxy can locate Viz.

Set the port the proxy should use to access

Viz.

rundown

Command name and Arguments Description

go_to_next_story Sets focus on the next story/group in the active rundown.

go_to_previous_story reload_template_images

(restString templates)

Sets focus on the previous story/group in the active rundown.

Reloads the thumbnails for all listed scene paths. If the scene paths are not given all thumbnails are reloaded.

script

Command name and Arguments Description

eval

(restString scriptExpression)

Evaluate the VBScript expression given as a parameter, and return the value converted to a string.

execute_script get_showscript_name import_script

Tries to run the OnUserClick event on the current template script. Doesn't report any errors e.g. if the event is not handled in the template script.

Gets the name of the current show script.

Specify full name, does not add .vbs to the script name

Imports the script into the current show.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 195

Page 196

Viz Trio User’s Guide

(string scriptName, restString scriptFilename) run_macro_script

(restString scriptCode) run_script

(string scriptFunction, restString argumentList) run_showscript

(string scriptFunction, restString argumentList)

Run the VBScript script code given as a parameter. The snippet can contain multiple lines of code. The macro will return either an empty string or an error message.

Run the specified script function. The argument list is a list of strings separated by commas or white space. Arguments that can contain commas or white space must be enclosed by double quotes.

Run the script associated with the current show. The argument list is a list of strings separated by commas or white space.

Arguments that can contain commas or white space must be enclosed by double quotes.

scroll2

Command name and Arguments Description

add_easepoint

(string pagename)

Add an easepoint to the current scroll.

clear_elements copy_element

(int sourceIndex, int targetIndex)

Clear scroll elements (remove all).

Add a copy of scroll element at sourceIndex to targetIndex.

create_scroll_template

(string sceneName, string templateDescription, float width, float height, boolean showBounds)

Create a new scroll template with the given parameters.

Edit an easepoint in the current scroll.

edit_easepoint

(string subpage, string easepoint) insert_objects

(int index, restString objects)

Insert SCENE or GEOM objects from viz into the current scroll.

insert_pages

(int index, restString pages) insert_range

(int index, string range) move_element

(int sourceIndex, int targetIndex) next_easepoint

Insert pages from current show into current scroll at index.

Insert an inclusive numerical range of pages

(e.g 1000-2000) from the current show, or a single page.

Move scroll element from sourceIndex to targetIndex.

Go to next ease point editor.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide next_element_data preview_continue preview_start preview_stop previous_easepoint previous_element_data program_continue program_start program_stop reload_all_page_data reload_page_data

(int index) reload_template_graphics reload_templates

Go to next element data (extra spacing) editor.

Continue the current scroll in preview.

Start the current scroll in preview.

Stop the current scroll in preview.

Go to previous ease point editor.

Go to previous element data (extra spacing) editor.

Continue the current scroll on the program channel (must be taken on-air first).

Start the current scroll on the program channel

(must be taken on-air first).

Stop the current scroll on the program channel

(must be taken on-air first).

Reload all scroll page data by copying from original pages.

Reload scroll page data at index by copying from original page.

Reload all scroll elements (reload geometry objects created during import of templates).

Reload all scroll elements by merging with the current show templates.

Remove a named easepoint in the current scroll.

Remove scroll element at index.

remove_easepoint

(string subpage, string easepoint) remove_element

(int index) rename_easepoint

(string subpage, string oldName, string newName) set_focus

(int index)

Rename an easepoint in the current scroll.

Focus on scroll element.

settings

Command name and Arguments Description

apply_gateway_settings Applies all MOS gateway settings which have been set up previously.

get_setting

(string path)

Gets a Viz setting.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 197

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 198 get_global_setting (string: path) Get a global setting.

get_vcp_database_connection_string Get VCP database connection string get_vcp_database_schema Get VCP database schema export_to_file (boolean: include_settings, boolean: include_profiles, restString filename)

Export settings to a file. If filename is empty, a file dialog will be shown.

enable_gateway (boolean: flag) Enables or disables the MOS gateway according to the given flag. After running this command settings:apply_gateway_settings have to be run in order to put the setting operative.

import_from_file (restString: filename) Export settings to a file using old format for import on Trio 2.6 and earlier. If filename is empty, a file dialog will be shown.

import_from_file (restString filename) Import settings from a file. If filename is empty, a file dialog will be shown.

start_gateway Starts the MOS gateway handler of the Viz

Media Sequencer Engine.

restart_gateway set_gateway_host (string hostname

[<port_nummer>])

Restarts the MOS gateway handler of the Viz

Media Sequencer Engine.

Changes the MOS gateway host name and port. <host-name> must be a valid host name or IP address where the gateway is running. <port-number> must be a valid port number. It is optional and defaults to 10640. After running this command settings:apply_gateway_settings have to be run in order to put the setting operative.

set_gateway_ncs_id (string: id) set_gateway_mos_id (string: id) set_gateway_messages_per_second

(int: seconds) set_vcp_database (string: connection_string, string: Schema)

Changes the gateway NCS ID. After running this command settings:apply_gateway_settings have to be run in order to put the setting operative.

Changes the gateway MOS ID. After running this command settings:apply_gateway_settings have to be run in order to put the setting operative.

Changes the number of messages per second to process by the MOS gateway. A zero value disables this setting. After running this command settings:apply_gateway_settings have to be run in order to put the setting operative.

Set VCP database connection setting

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide set_global_setting Sets a global Viz setting (e.g.

settings:set_global_setting encoding

ISO-8859-1).

Set a show setting.

set_setting

(string path, restString value) set_send_item_stat (boolean: flag) stop_gateway

Enables or disables the item stat sending of the MOS gateway according to the given flag. After running this command settings:apply_gateway_settings have to be run in order to put the setting operative.

Stops the MOS gateway handler of the Viz

Media Sequencer Engine.

show

Command name and Arguments Description

append_pages_from_xml

(boolean showDialogs, string filename) copy_pages (restString: pageList)

Loads pages from XML and replaces any pages that will be overwritten.

Copies the given page(s) to the clipboard

Copy the pages to a destination number.

copy_pages_to_number

(int destination, restString

CommaSeperatedList) copy_pages_with_offset

(int offset, int CommaSeperatedList)

Copy the pages to a destination number.

Create a combo mastertemplate create_combo_template (string: name, string: pagellist) create_group

(string groupname) create_playlist

(restString name)

Create a page group in the current show, before the focused node.

Adds a new playlist to the show and returns the path to the new playlist. If name is omitted, a dialog will pop up asking for a name.

Create a new show. The show path may specify a show within a show folder.

create_show

(restString showPath) cut_pages (page list) delete_all_pages delete_templates

(restString templateList)

Cuts the given page(s) to the clipboard.

Deletes all the pages in the page view.

Delete the given templates from the current show. Does nothing if the show does not have concepts and variants enabled.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 199

Page 200

Viz Trio User’s Guide enable_context export_setting

(string name, restString value) export_show

(filename:string) get_all_timing_handlers

Enable concept/variant for the current show.

Configure an export setting, use this before export_show.

Export a show (trio archive).

get_associated_files get_background_scenes

Returns a comma separated list of all timing handlers.

Get the list of associated files for the show

Get a space-separated list of background scenes in the show.

Get the show-concept.

Get the show-context-variable.

get_concept get_context_variable

(string variable) get_custom_colors get_default_viz_path

Get the custom colors for the current show.

Get the default viz scene path for the current show.

Returns a list of pages in the specified group.

get_group_pages get_groups get_library_path

Returns a list of groups in the current show.

Get the default viz scene path for the current show.

get_page_xml(restString page_path) Get the xml for the specified page. The path is given as showpath/<page-id>

(e.g.

get_page_xml myshow/1000). For

"untitled show" use empty showpath (

e.g.

get_page_xml /1002). Note that show names are case sensitive.

Returns a list of pages in the current show.

get_pages get_preview_background_image Get the Preview background image for the current show.

Get the list of scenes for the given pages.

get_scenes_for_pages

(restString pagelist) get_setting

(string path)

Get a show setting.

get_settings get_show_description get_show_name

Get all settings.

Get the description of the current show.

Get the name of the current show.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide get_templates get_timing_handler get_variable

(string propname) get_variant goto_viz_dir

(path:string) import

(scenes:string) import_and_initialize

(scenes:string) import_no_gui

(restString sceneNames) import_pages_from_xml

(string filename, int offset, boolean interactive, boolean pageNames) import_recursively

(string path) import_setting

(string name, restString value) import_show

(filename:string) load_armed load_locally

Returns a list of templates in the current show.

Returns the timing handler for the current show.

Get the value of a show variable.

Get the show-variant.

Change to a show with the same name as a viz directory, creating it if necessary.

Shows the Import Scenes

pane or imports specified scene(s).

Import scenes to templates, then reload on external renderers.

Imports the scenes given as parameter without showing/closing the import GUI.

Import the named pages from an XML file.

An offset different from zero will cause pages with numerical names to be offset by this number, unless they are templates. Pages are overwritten automatically if interactive is false.

Import all the scenes recursively from this folder.

Configure an import setting, use this before import_show.

Import a show (Viz Trio archive).

load_show load_show_on_renderers

(string ProgramChannelName, restString PreviewChannelName) move_pages_to_group

(string group, restString pages) move_pages_to_number

Load all armed elements on their channels.

Loads all scenes referenced by pages in the current show on the local viz preview.

Load show (scenes, textures, fonts) on external output channels. Replaces the old initialize command.

Load current show on the specified channels.

First argument is treated as a program channel, second as preview.

Move pages into the specified group. If the group name is empty, move to top level.

Move the pages to destination number

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 201

Page 202

Viz Trio User’s Guide

(int destination, restString

CommaSeperatedList) move_pages_with_offset

(int destination, int

CommaSeperatedList) paste_pages page_exists (restString page) reimport_templates (string: templateList) reload_current_show reload_on_renderers (string: template_l load_on_renderers

(restString pages) rename_page

(string old_name, restString new_name) run_show

(boolean b) save_pages

(string FileName, restString

CommaSeperatedList) save_pages_to_xml

(string filename) save_selected_pages

(restString fileName) set_associated_files

(restString filelist) set_concept

(restString concept) set_context_variable

(string variable, restString value) set_custom_colors

(restString colors)

Move the pages with an offset.

Pastes the given page(s) from the clipboard to the current show.

Checks if a page with the specified name exists in the current show. Returns "true" or

"false".

Reimport the given templates

Reloads the current show

Reload (re-initialize) graphics for the specified master templates or scene info on program and preview channels.

Load (initialize) graphics for the specified pages on program and preview channels.

Rename a page name in the opened show

Runs/stops the show.

Saves the pages given as parameter to XML.

Saves pages to XML.

Saves the selected pages to XML.

Set the associated files for the show. ("file1"

"file2" "file3").

Set the show-concept to a new value.

Set the show-variant to a new value.

Set the custom colors for the current show.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide set_default_scene_effect (restString: effect)

Sets the default transition effect to be used between (scene-based) pages. Empty string specifies hard cuts (default).

set_default_video_effect (restString: effect) set_default_viz_path

(path:string) set_dir

(restString path)

Sets the default transition effect to be used between videos and stillstore images. Empty string specifies hard cuts (default).

Set the default viz scene path for the current show.

Changes the show directory to the path specified.

set_external_cursor

(restString pagename) set_filter

Set the external cursor to page with page name or to current page if page name is empty.

Set the filter of the page list or the currently active page view. The filter must already exist.

Calling with no filter name will reset the filter of the page view.

Set the design-library path.

set_library_path

(restString path) set_preview_background_image

(path:string) set_setting

(string path, restString value)

Set the preview background image for the current show.

Set a show setting.

set_show_description

(description:string) set_show_name

(name:string) set_timing_handler

(string handlerName) set_variable

(string propname, restString value) set_variant

(restString variant) show_export_dialog_for_path

(restString showpath)

Set the description of the current show.

Set the name of the current show.

Set the timing handler for the current show.

Set the value of a show variable. The value is stored on the Media Sequencer.

Set the show-variant to a new value.

Exports the show.

sock

Command name and Arguments Description

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 203

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 204 connect_socket disconnect_socket send_socket_data

(restString text) set_com_baud

(int comBaudRate) set_com_number

(int comPortNumber) set_socket_autoconnect

(boolean autoconnect)

Explicitly connect (open) the socket, if not already connected.

Disconnect (close) the socket, if connected.

Send UTF-8 encoded text over the socket. If it is a server socket, send to all clients.

Set baud rate to use for the serial port.

Set COM port number to use for the serial port.

set_socket_data_separator

(string separator) set_socket_encoding

(string encoding) set_socket_host

(string hostname) set_socket_port

(int port) set_socket_type

(string type) socket_is_connected

If auto-connect is true, a client socket will be connected the first time data is sent, or a server socket will be opened automatically.

Set the separator for the

OnSocketDataReceived callback.

Set text encoding for socket to either UTF-8 or

ISO-8859-1.

Set the socket hostname. Does nothing if the socket type is server.

Set the socket port number.

Set the socket type to client or server.

Returns true if the socket is connected, false otherwise.

tabfield

Command name and Arguments Description

active

(active:string)

Toggle active flag of current tab field or set its value (0 or 1).

browse_file clock downcase_tabfield

Change to the browse file editor of the current tabfield or set the full path to a file.

Change to clock editor of current tab field or set its value (string).

Convert current tab field to lower case, if it contains text.

edit_property

(string propertyName)

Changes editor to the specified property i.e

1.image.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide geom

(vizPath:string) get_custom_property

(string tabfieldName) get_tabfield_property

(tabfieldnr:integer,property:string) image

(vizPath:string) image_position

Change to geometry editor of current tab field or set its value (GEOM*path).

Gets the custom property of the tab field. "" will get it for the current tab field.

Gets a property value for a given tab field.

image_scaling import_value_from_file

(restString filename) kerning

(value:float) material

(vizPath:string) next_property position

(value:float) previous_property rotation

(value:float) scaling

(value:float) set_custom_property

(string tabfieldName, string value) set_tabfield_property

(prop:string, value:string) set_value

(value:string) text

(value:string)

Change to image editor of current tab field or set its value (IMAGE*path or filename).

Change to image position editor of current tab field or set its value (two floats).

Change to image scaling editor of current tab field or set its value (two floats).

Load a tab field value from a text file (UTF-8 encoded).

Change to kerning editor of current tab field or set its value (float).

Change to material editor of current tab field or set its value (MATERIAL*path).

Select the next property of the current tab field, or the first if the last one is currently selected.

Change to position editor of current tab field or set its value (floats).

Select the previous property of the current tab field, or the last if the first one is currently selected.

Change to rotation editor of current tab field or set its value (floats).

Change to scaling editor of current tab field or set its value (float).

Sets the custom property of the tab field. "" as tab-field name will use the current tab field.

Set a property value.

Sets the value of the current tab-field property.

Change to text editor of current tab field or set its value (unicode string).

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 205

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 206 toggle_current_custom_property

(string value1, string value2) upcase_tabfield value

table

Command name and Arguments Description

clear_sorting

(string table key)

Clear the sorted state of a table property.

delete_rows

(string table key, string row index list)

Delete a number of rows from a table property.

get_row_num (string: table_key) insert_rows_with_xml (string: table_key, int: row_index, restString:

XML_data_to_insert)

Get the number of rows of a table property.

Insert several rows with their data into a table property.

get_cell_value

(string table key, string column key, int row num) list_columns (string: table_key)

Get a cell value of a table property.

Returns the column IDs of a table property as space separated list.

Insert a number of rows into a table property.

insert_rows

(string table key, int row index, int number of rows to insert) move_current_row_down move_current_row_up

Move the selected row in the current table editor one step downwards.

Move the selected row in the current table editor one step upwards.

Move a row downwards behind the target row or upwards before the target row.

move_row

(string table key, int row index to move, int target row index) set_cell_value

(string table key, string column key, int row num, restString new value)

Set a cell value of a table property.

sort_column

(<table key> <column key>

[ascending or descending] (optional, default: ascending))

Sort a table ascending or descending after a column.

text

Toggle the custom property of the current tab field between the two given values.

Convert current tab field to upper case, if it contains text.

Change to default editor.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Command name and Arguments Description

incr_alpha

(string key, string selectionStart, string selectionEnd, float alpha)

Increment or decrement the transparency of selected text.

incr_kerning

(string key, string selectionStart, string selectionEnd, float kerning)

Increment or decrement the kerning of selected text.

Increment or decrement the position of selected text.

incr_position

(string key, string selectionStart, string selectionEnd, float posX, float posY, float posZ) incr_rotation

(string key, string selectionStart, string selectionEnd, float rotX, float rotY, float rotZ)

Increment or decrement the rotation of selected text.

incr_scale

(string key, string selectionStart, string selectionEnd, float scaleX, float scaleY, float scaleZ)

Increment or decrement the scaling of selected text.

Revert current text to saved value.

revert

(string key) set_alpha_mode Set text manipulation mode to Alpha.

Change the color of selected text.

set_color

(string key, string selectionStart, string selectionEnd, string color) set_color_mode set_justification

(string key, string justification) set_kerning_mode set_position_mode

Set text manipulation mode to Color.

Set the text justification (LEFT, CENTER,

RIGHT).

Set text manipulation mode to Kerning.

Set text manipulation mode to Kerning.

set_rotate_xy_mode set_rotate_z_mode set_scale_mode show_replace_list

Set text manipulation mode to Rotate x and y.

Set text manipulation mode to Rotate z.

Set text manipulation mode to Scale.

Shows the pre-configured character palette for the character to the left of the cursor.

trio

Command name and Arguments Description

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 207

Page 208

Viz Trio User’s Guide activate_current_playlist assign_script

(string page, boolean fileScript, restString scriptunit) cleanup check_channels_status cleanup_all_channels cleanup_channel

(restString channelname) cleanup_renderers clear_preview clear_program continue_last_taken_page create_snapshot_page display_imported_archives deactivate_current_playlist exchange exit freeze_program_clock

(string string) get_global_variable

(string propname)

Activate current playlist

Assign or change the script for the specified page.

Performs a clean-up of the current show with all playlists on external renderers by clearing

Viz layers and freeing memory.

Check connection status of program and preview channels in profile. Both for Viz Engine and video channels. Returns "true" if all are good, "false" otherwise.

Cleans up all channels in the current profile by clearing Viz layers and freeing memory. Does not clear the channel for transition logic pages.

Cleans up the specified channel by clearing Viz layers and freeing memory.

Note: The

trio:clear_channel command duplicated the

trio:cleanup_channel

command and is therefore as of version 2.10

deprecated.

Cleans up the renderers of the current playlist

(frees graphics and clears output) on the utilized external output channels.

Cleans up Viz preview channel by clearing Viz layers and freeing memory.

Cleans up Viz program channel by clearing Viz layers and freeing memory.

Continue the page that was last taken.

Takes a snapshot and creates a page with that snapshot.

Display a list of the imported trio-archives.

Deactivate current playlist

Exchange the content of the program and external preview.

Close the Trio.

Freeze a clock on the program machine.

Get the value of a global variable.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide get_next_savenumber help initialize initialize_show_or_playlist invoke_with_current_page

(string commandName) invoke_with_current_scene

(string commandName) offair onair open_printsettings_dialog

(restString pages) print_and_save_snapshots

(restString pages)

Get the number that will be proposed on the next save as or with a create_snapshot_page.

Opens the Viz Trio user’s guide. The help file is also opened by clicking the Help button in the user interface (next to Config), or by pressing the F1 key unless it has been assigned to

another action (e.g. macro). See also General

settings.

Initializes the current show (both page list and all playlists) on external renderers.

Initialize current show or playlist on external renderers.

Invoke the given command with the name of the current page as a parameter (useful for macro shortcuts).

Invoke the given command with the name of the current scene as a parameter (useful for macro shortcuts).

Set client in off-air mode.

Set client in on-air mode.

Open the printer-settings dialog.

print_snapshots

(restString pages) process_ii_string

(restString value) rename_show_folder (string: old_name, restString: new_name) rename_show (string: old_name, string: new_name) restart_local_viz

Print the pages. Use settings printer/ left_margin, printer/right_margin, printer/ top_margin, printer/bottom_margin to control the size, where the value is the percent of the page width/height.

Print the pages. Use settings printer/ left_margin, printer/right_margin, printer/ top_margin, printer/bottom_margin to control the size, where the value is the percent of the page width/height. With no argument, the content of the preview is printed.

Sends a string to the intelligent interface handler on the Media Sequencer and lets it process it.

Rename a folder.

Rename a show.

Restarts the local Viz preview channel.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 209

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 210 restart_local_viz_program save_snapshots

(restString pages) send_local_vizcmd

(command:string) send_preview_vizcmd

(command:string) send_preview_vizcmd_noerror

(restString command) send_vizcmd

(command:string) send_vizcmd_to_channel

(string channelName, restString command) set_global_variable

(string propname, restString value) set_mcu_folder

(string string) set_vizconnection_timeout

(int timeout) set_next_savenumber (int: name) show_trio_settings_dialog show_settings_dialog (restString: category) sleep

(int millisec)

Restarts the local Viz program channel. Only available when local program channel has been started.

Print the pages. Use settings printer/ left_margin, printer/right_margin, printer/ top_margin, printer/bottom_margin to control the size, where the value is the percent of the page width/height.

Send a command or a list of commands separated by newlines to the local viz preview.

Returns a list of return values from viz.

Newlines within a single command must be escaped (\n).

Send a Viz command to the preview renderer.

Send a Viz command to the preview renderer if possible, otherwise do nothing (no error message).

Send a Viz command to the program renderer.

Send a Viz command to a specified channel.

Set the value of a global property. The value is stored on the Media Sequencer.

Sets the folder of the MCU/AVS plug-in.

Set the Viz connection timeout.

Set the number that will be proposed on the next saveas or with a create_snapshot_page

Show dialog containing a tree view of Trio settings.

Show dialog containing a tree view of Trio settings

Sleeps a page a certain amount of milliseconds.

For example:

TrioCmd("page:take 1000")

TrioCmd("trio:sleep 10000")

TrioCmd("page:take 1001")

TrioCmd("trio:sleep 10000")

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide swap_channels synchronize_clocks

TrioCmd("page:takeout")

Swap the program and preview channels.

Synchronize the clocks to the clocks on the program renderer.

Continue the page that was last taken.

Freeze a clock on the program machine.

takeout_last_taken_page unfreeze_program_clock

(string string)

util

Command name and Arguments Description

get_node_text

(string string)

Gets the node text of a Media Sequencer node.

list_archive_files

(filename:string) list_archive_pages

(filename:string)

Returns a list of files in a trio archive (will also work for other tar files).

Returns a list of pages in a trio archive (creates a list of all_pages.xml within the Viz Trio archive).

Returns a list of parameters of a trio archive.

list_archive_parameters

(restString filename) list_xml_pages

(restString filename)

Returns a list of pages in an XML file.

run_mse_entry

(string path) set_node_text

(string path, restString value)

Runs the node at the specified path. No context is given.

Sets the node text of a Media Sequencer node.

viz

Command name and Arguments Description

cleanup_locally Cleanup (unload) all viz resources locally. If a scene is active in the local renderer, it is not cleaned up.

continue Continue the animation in viz preview (if stopped).

import_image_from_file

(string filename, restString pool folder) play

Import the given image file into the given viz image pool folder.

Start (play) the animation in viz preview.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 211

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 212 load_data_locally (boolean: paths) reload_data_locally

(boolean paths) set_bounding_box

(boolean visible) set_key_alpha set_key_preview set_rgb set_safearea

(boolean visible) set_stage_pos

(restString pos) set_titlearea

(boolean visible) stop

Load viz resources locally. The space-separated list of paths must include the pool prefix and full path, e.g. SCENE*folder/name

Reload viz resources locally. The spaceseparated list of paths must include the pool prefix and full path, e.g. SCENE*folder/name.

Toggle bounding box visibility.

Viz Artist setting.

Viz Artist setting.

Viz Artist setting.

Toggle safe area visibility.

Set the current stage position.

Toggle title area visibility.

Stop the animation in viz preview.

vtwtemplate

Command name and Arguments Description

get_template import_template

(string ScriptName, restString

FileName) reimport_active_template

Gets the VTW template for the current show.

Imports a template from file to the current show. Overwrites any template with the same name.

run_vtw_function

(string functionName, restString argumentList)

Reimports the active VTW template for the current show.

Runs a script function in the active VTW template. The argument list is a list of strings separated by commas or white space.

Arguments that can contain commas or white space must be enclosed by double quotes.

run_vtw_script

(string FunctionName, restString

Data) set_template

(restString templateName)

Runs a script function in the active VTW template. Only a single parameter is supported by the Data parameter, so use vtwtemplate:run_vtw_function instead if possible.

Sets the VTW template for the current show.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

See Also

Scripting

9.2

9.2.1

Events

There are two types of events in scripts: template scripts with template events and

show scripts with show events. They look similar, but are not the same.

When used in scripts, the events will be called only if the specific event described by the event-handler occurs.

IMPORTANT! Template scripts are loaded only when a page/template is read.

Some template events are triggered only if the template or a page using this template is read.

This section contains reference information on the following topics:

Template event callbacks

Show event callbacks

Template event callbacks

OnContinue(): Called when the Continue button is pressed or a continue macro command is executed. Only triggered if the template or a page using this template is read.

OnInitialize: Called when the Initialize button is pressed or an initialize macro command is executed.

OnBeforeSave() This procedure is called before Trio saves the current page. The script can cancel the saving by returning false (

OnBeforeSave = false).

OnSave: Called when the Save button is pressed or a save macro command is executed.

OnBeforeTake(): This function is called before Trio runs take on the current page.

The script can cancel the take action by returning false (

OnBeforeTake = false).

Only triggered if the template or a page using this template is read.

OnTake(): Called when the Take button is pressed or a take macro command is executed. Only triggered if the template or a page using this template is read.

OnTakeOut(): Called when the Take Out button is pressed or a take out macro command is executed. Only triggered if the template or a page using this template is read.

OnUpdate(): Called when an update action is executed in Viz Trio (See keyboard shortcut list on control page).

OnUserClick(): Called when the user clicks the Run macro button or when the Viz

Trio macro command

execute_script is executed.

OnValueChanged(PropertyName,NewPropertyValue): Used with template scripts. The event is called when a property in the page is changed. It sends in the name of the property and the new value.

OnSocketDataReceived: Called when socket data is received on the defined port.

A socket object must be configured on the configuration page.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 213

Viz Trio User’s Guide

9.2.2

OnPropertyFocused(PropertyName): Called when a tab-field editor gets focus in the Viz Trio user interface. It sends the property name into the function that uses the event.

OnShowVariableChanged(Name, Value): This procedure is called when a global variable is changed or added. All Trio clients (including the client where this command was issued) that have the same show open will receive the event when the command

show:set_variable is used .

OnGlobalVariableChanged(Name, Value): This procedure is called when a show variable is changed or added. All Trio clients that are connected to the same Media

Sequencer with the same show open will receive the event when the command

trio:set_global_variable is used.

Show event callbacks

OnShowOpen(): Called when show is opened.

OnShowClose(): Called when show is closed.

OnRead(): Called when the Read button is pressed or a read macro command is executed.

OnRead(PageName): Called when a spesific page is read.

OnContinue(PageName): Called when the Continue button is pressed or a continue macro command is executed.

OnInitializeShow(): same as OnInitialize for template scripts

OnCleanupRenderers(): Called when the

trio:cleanup_renderers or

trio:cleanup_all_channels commands are executed.

OnBeforeSave(PageName): Called before a specific page is saved.

OnSave(PageName): Called when a specific page is saved.

OnBeforeTake(PageName): Called before a specific page is taken.

OnTake(): Called when the Take button is pressed or a take macro command is executed.

OnTake(PageName): Called when a specific page is taken.

OnTakeOut: Called when the Take Out button is pressed or a take out macro command is executed.

OnTakeOut(PageName): Called when a specific page is taken out.

OnUpdate(PageName): Called when a specific page is updated.

OnValueChanged(PageName, PropertyName,NewPropertyValue): Used with show scripts to specify the page (PageName) that is called. The event is called when a property in a show’s page is changed. It sends in the name of the page, the name of the property and the new value.

OnSocketDataReceived(data): Called when data received on socket.

OnPropertyFocused(PageName, PropertyName): Called when property focused.

OnCopy(OldName, NewName): Called when a page is copied. The event is only available to show scripts.

OnCopy(OldName, NewName): Called when page copied from old to new.

OnMove(OldName, NewName): Called when a page is moved or renamed. The event is only available to show scripts.

OnDelete(PageName): Called when a page is deleted. The script can abort the deletion by returning false (

OnDelete = false). Note that this event is a function,

Page 214 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide hence, it can return a value. If you set it to

false it will not delete the page in question. If you set it to anything else or do not return a value, the page in question will be deleted. The event is only available to show scripts (see

Using the OnDelete script event ).

OnShowVariableChanged(Name, Value): Called when show variable changed.

OnGlobalVariableChanged(Name, Value): Called when global variable changed.

IMPORTANT! An event with the same name but different argument value(s) are

not equal. For example OnRead() and OnRead(Pagename) are not the same event.

Using the OnDelete script event

For example, the following script will cancel the delete operation of any page named

2000.

function OnDelete(PageName) if PageName = "2000" then

OnDelete = false else

OnDelete = true end if end function

The following are examples of commands that will trigger this event:

VizBoldgui

:copy_selected_pages_to_number

VizBoldgui

:copy_selected_pages_with_offset

VizBoldgui

:move_selected_pages_to_number

VizBoldgui

:move_selected_pages_with_offset

VizBoldshow

:copy_pages_to_number

VizBoldshow

:copy_pages_with_offset

VizBoldshow

:delete_all_pages

VizBoldshow

:delete_templates

VizBoldshow

:move_pages_to_number

VizBoldshow

:move_pages_with_offset

VizBoldshow

:rename_page

VizBoldpage :delete_page

VizBoldpage :delete_pagerange

See Also

Scripting

Commands

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 215

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 216 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

10 Designer

There are two ways of doing scene design for Viz Trio. One is using Viz Artist, which in most cases is the preferred way, and another is using the built-in designer. The

Designer enables you to use pre-made scene elements or building blocks for creating a standalone scene.

Note: Transition logic is not supported.

This section contains information on the following topics:

About Viz Trio Designer

Creating Scene Elements in Viz Artist

To start the Designer

To start the Designer

• Click the menu option Tools and then select Trio Designer in the drop-down menu.

See Also

• Viz Artist User’s Guide

10.1

About Viz Trio Designer

Viz Trio Designer will display the designer’s library of pre-defined scene elements. The scene elements are created in Viz Artist and includes the required control plug-ins for exposing the scene properties the operator can adjust. The user can easily group the different scene elements together in order to create more advanced scene. In the

Designer it is also possible to modify the scene element’s properties, provided that they have been exposed for editing (ref. Control Plug-ins).

This section contains information on the following topics:

Scene

Resources

Scene Tree

Tab Fields

Page Editor

Properties

See Also

• Viz Artist 3.3 User’s Guide or later on Control Plug-ins

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 217

Viz Trio User’s Guide

10.1.1

Scene

The scene pane is located in the upper left corner of the Designer. It contains functions for scene management and control, such as New, Open, Save, Save As, and Close buttons.

• New Scene - Click the New button to create a new scene.

Open Scenes - Displays the Viz browser, which provides access to the Viz scene database. Each scene is represented as an icon reflecting the appearance of the scene as it was when last saved. The scene icons are displayed to the right in the scene database pane. The scenes are organized in folders which can be accessed through the folder tree to the left. The tree structure is the same as available in the

SCENE folder in the Viz Artist data directory. The scenes can be sorted by Name or

Date. The Refresh button refreshes the content for the selected folder.

Viz browser:

Page 218

Save - Saves changes applied to the currently selected scene.

Save As - Saves changes applied to the currently selected scene to a new name.

Close - Closes the currently selected scene. If the scene contains unsaved changes, the user will be prompted for a confirmation.

Description - Can be used to enter a description for the scene which will be displayed in the Template Description column in Viz Trio.

Layer - Allows the renderer layer for the new scene to be specified. The graphics can be played in the FRONT, MAIN and BACK layer. The MAIN layer, also called

MAIN, is the default layer. By using different layers it is possible to have up to three elements on screen simultaneously. However, if they are positioned at the same X and Y positions, graphical elements in the front layer will cover graphical elements in the main and back layers. Likewise, graphical elements in the main layer will obscure graphics in the back layer.

Callup Code - Displays the callup code of the currently selected page. New pages, that have not been saved, will have the page name [NEW]. Click the Save As button to save it with a specific callup code.

See Also

• Viz Artist 3.3 User’s Guide on transition logic

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

10.1.2

Resources

Note: The Library path is set in Show Properties

, and should be named

LIBRARY.

The Resources pane contains all the scene elements available to Viz Trio, and is automatically displayed when opening the Designer. The scene elements are created in

Viz Artist, and include the required control plug-ins.

Scene elements are basically scenes created in Viz Artist, however, they are not standalone scenes. They are made more like building blocks such that they can be pieced together with other scene elements in order for a Viz Trio operator to create a standalone scene on the fly.

Scene elements are organized under a

LIBRARY folder in Viz with the following sub folders;

BACKGROUNDS, BACKPLATES, TEXT, IMAGES, BARS, PIES, LAYOUT, MISC and

ANIMATIONS. The various folders become available when selecting the corresponding categories using the buttons in the Resources pane.

In addition to the pre-defined scene elements, it is possible to use ordinary Viz Artist scenes, if a group with a placeholder has been added to it, when creating new scenes in Viz Trio’s Designer. The Viz Artist folder tree is displayed when clicking the Full Tree button.

Each scene element is represented by an icon in the right part of the Resources pane.

The scene elements in each category are organized in folders, accessible through the folder tree to the left. The tree structure is the same as the

SCENE folder tree in the Viz

Artist data directory. Browse the folder tree to locate the scene elements to use. Scene elements can be sorted by Name or Date and in reverse order. Click the Refresh button to update the content of the selected folder.

Also, the storage location distinguishes scene elements from ordinary standalone scenes as the scenes must be stored in the designated

LIBRARY sub-folders. This will ensure that they become available as scene elements in the Designer interface, see

To create a new scene element

for further details. Furthermore, the scene elements contain control plug-ins that enable the user to edit exposed properties and organize them in parent-child hierarchies.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 219

Viz Trio User’s Guide

IMPORTANT! Standalone scenes cannot be edited in the Designer. They can only be used as is, and must be added to separate placeholders in the Scene tree.

Furthermore, standalone scenes cannot parent other scene elements.

Background - Shows the background scene elements available in

BACKGROUNDS

library folder. Select a background, and add it to the scene by drag and drop onto the root placeholder.

Backplate - Shows the backplate scene elements available in the

BACKPLATES

library folder. Select a backplate, and add it to the scene by drag and drop onto the root placeholder.

Text - Shows the fonts scene elements in the

TEXT library folder. Adding text to a scene adds a text tab-field that is used by the operator for editing in the

Page Editor. Font scene elements may have special effects such as alpha, mask, and shadow. Select a font scene element, and add it by drag and drop onto the appropriate placeholder. This will automatically enable the tab-field for text editing.

Images - Shows the images available in the

IMAGES library folder. As with the Text button, the Image button adds a tab-field for editing by an operator. Clicking the

Image button opens the Images library where an image can be selected and added by drag and drop onto the appropriate placeholder.

Bar - Shows the bar scene objects available in the

BARS library folder. Select a bar scene element, and add it to the scene by drag and drop onto the appropriate placeholder. To create a scene with several bars a layout scene element should be created that can hold the individual bar scene elements.

Pie - Shows the pie scene objects available in the

PIES library folder. Select a pie, and add it to the scene by drag and drop onto the appropriate placeholder.

Layout - Shows the layout scene elements available in the

LAYOUT library folder.

The folder contains design elements which allow for easy alignment of other scene elements, by organizing them in for instance lines or rows. The layout element themselves usually do not contain any graphics. They should ideally function as placeholders in which other types of scene elements can be added. Select a layout, and add it to the scene by drag and drop onto the root placeholder.

Miscellaneous - Shows the miscellaneous scene elements available in the

MISC

library folder. These can be anything you decide to put there that does not fit in the other categories, such as 3D objects, bullets, and placeholders. Select a scene element, and add it to the scene tree by drag and drop onto the appropriate placeholder.

Animation - Shows the animation scene elements in the

ANIMATIONS library folder.

Add an animation to the scene by drag and drop onto the placeholder holding the scene element to animate.

Full Tree - Shows a full Viz directory structure that provides an overview of all available scenes.

10.1.3

Scene Tree

Page 220 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

The scene tree provides a logical visualization of all the graphical elements in a scene.

The tree consists of placeholders containing the different types of scene elements.

A standalone scene is built by selecting various scene elements from the Resources libraries and dragging them onto the scene tree. In the scene tree it is possible to create a hierarchy between elements and groups of elements in logical divisions. This allows for new properties to be assigned to more than one scene element in a single operation.

The black arrow to the left indicates that the placeholder has sub-containers. If the arrow points to the right the sub-containers are not displayed. Click on the arrow to expand the sub-containers. The arrow will then point downwards.

To delete an item in the scene tree

• Select the appropriate scene element and then press the Delete key. Note that this will also delete sub nodes.

Caution: You cannot undo a delete operation.

10.1.4

Tab Fields

Scene elements can have one or more tab fields. When selecting a scene element in the

Scene Tree

, the associated tab fields are displayed in the tab fields pane in the lower left corner of the designer tool. In the tab fields pane it is possible to see which

Properties that can be exposed for editing in Viz Trio. Click the ‘+’ sign to expand a tab

field’s list of exposable properties.

10.1.5

Page Editor

When selecting a tab-field from the

Tab Fields pane, the corresponding page editor

is displayed in the upper right corner of the Designer. Use the page editor to edit the

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 221

Viz Trio User’s Guide selected tab field’s properties, like for instance changing material, position, rotation, text, and so on, provided they have been exposed for editing.

The type of page editor displayed varies according to the type of element selected, e.g. text, images, etc. The buttons in the left part of the page editor area represent the various exposable properties of the currently selected tab field. To display the corresponding editor, click on the appropriate button or select the property in the

Tab

Fields

pane.

10.1.6

Properties

Page 222

The Properties pane becomes available when selecting the Properties tab in the lower left corner of the Resources pane.

Use the Properties pane to define which Tab Fields should be exposed for editing in Viz

Trio. The properties pane consists of three parts: a

Property Tree

, a Property Description

Editor

, and a

Property Type Editor .

This section contains information on the following topics:

Property Tree

Property Description Editor

Property Type Editor

To expose properties

To map multiple property receivers to one exposed property

To remove properties

Property Tree

Initially, when creating a new scene, the properties pane is empty. Tab field properties are exposed for editing by adding them to the properties pane (top left).

The Viz Trio Designer provides two different approaches

To expose properties : exposing

properties in a tab-field one by one, or exposing all properties in one operation.

Use the properties pane to define tab field properties that should be exposed for

editing in Viz Trio. The Tab Fields pane provides a list of properties that can be exposed

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide for editing for each of the tab fields in a scene. Expose as many of them as needed for editing.

A Viz Artist designer, that creates the resources, can define the properties to be exposed for editing when creating the scene element in Viz Artist. Exposed properties may vary from scene to scene. Note that additional properties must be exposed through Viz Artist.

The nodes in the properties tree are named Tabfield: 1, Tabfield: 2, Tabfield: 3, and so on as they are added. The order of the tab fields can be rearranged by drag and drop.

Appended to each tab field are sub-nodes representing the exposed properties (e.g.

position and rotation). The sub-nodes have child nodes that represents the receiver of the exposed property’s data value, for example the selected scene element. The child node typically displays a property name and a symbol, in addition to the receiving scene element’s name (e.g. background).

It is possible to expose several properties for one tab field by dragging the property icons onto the same tab field container from the

Page Editor .

It is also possible to map two or more property receivers to one exposed property. This will control the value of several property receivers through one exposed property. This is for instance useful if wanting to change a property, such as kerning or material, for several scene elements in a single operation. This is illustrated in the example below, where the exposed property kerning controls the kerning value of the three attached property receivers called LowerThird_RedBox_2lines.

Furthermore, property receivers of various types, like for instance an image and a text object, can be mapped to the same exposed property, even when located in different tab fields. This will allow edits to all the associated property receivers in one single operation. In the example below, the exposed property Image, controls the content of

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 223

Viz Trio User’s Guide the associated image and text property receivers. This implies that when selecting a new image (see

Search Media

), the text related to the image will be added accordingly.

Another example is when connected to a newsroom system and changes are made to a text and an image in the same tab field by entering a text string instead of the whole path. This implies that there is a folder of images (e.g. flags) and the Viz Trio system receives ‘US’ from the external system, it will then load the image with the path: ‘image location prefix + US’, provided that the image location prefix has been specified.

Property Description Editor

Page 224

The Property Description editor is displayed in the upper right corner of the Properties pane. It is used to edit the description parameters of a tab field. The fields become available for editing when selecting a property in the

Property Tree

. All fields, apart from the Key field, are editable.

Name - Shows the name of the selected tab field property.

Key - Displays the key identifier of the property.

Description - Shows the description for the selected tab field. The description is displayed in the

Page List

.

Type - Shows the data input type defined for the selected property. The value selected in the Type field determines which

Page Editor will be displayed.

Property Type Editor

The Property Type editor is closely linked to the value selected in the Type field in the

Property Description Editor . When selecting a value in the Type field, the fields in the

Property Type editor will be updated accordingly, such that values for the associated parameters can be specified.

Text

Allows the designer to set text parameters.

Single Line - Disables text wrapping displaying the text as a single line.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Character Limit - Allows for setting a maximum number of characters for the selected text tab field.

Float

Allows the designer to specify a minimum and a maximum value for the selected property. Select one or more of the check boxes to display the associated input fields.

Min Value - Sets the minimum input value for the selected property.

Max Value - Sets the maximum input value for the selected property.

Deny browsing

Allows the designer to deny the Viz Trio user from browsing for images, geometries, and materials in folders other than the selected folder and its sub-folders.

Duplet

Allows the designer to specify a minimum and a maximum value for the X and Y axes of the selected property. Select one or more of the check boxes to display the associated input fields.

Min X - Sets the minimum value for the X axis of the selected property.

Max X - Sets the maximum value for the X axis of the selected property.

Min Y - Sets the minimum value for the Y axis of the selected property.

Max Y - Sets the maximum value for the Y axis of the selected property.

Triplet

Allows the designer to specify a minimum and a maximum value for the X and Y axes of the selected property, as well as the Z axis. Select one or more of the check boxes to display the associated input fields.

Min X - Sets the minimum value for the X axis of the selected property.

Max X - Sets the maximum value for the X axis of the selected property.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 225

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Min Y - Sets the minimum value for the Y axis of the selected property.

Max Y - Sets the maximum value for the Y axis of the selected property.

Min Z - Sets the minimum value for the Z axis of the selected property.

Max Z - Sets the maximum value for the Z axis of the selected property.

To expose properties

1.

In the

Page Editor

, select the icon or design element representing the property to expose for editing, and drag and drop it onto the

Property Tree

, or

2.

Drag and drop a container from the

Scene Tree

onto the

Property Tree

to generate a complete list of exposed properties.

To map multiple property receivers to one exposed property

• Drag and drop the property receiver onto the exposed property that should control both properties.

To remove properties

• Select a property and press the Delete key on the keyboard. Note that this will also delete sub-nodes.

10.2

Creating Scene Elements in Viz Artist

This section provides a basic introduction on how to create scene elements in Viz Artist.

Creating scene elements basically consist of two main activities; creating the graphics and adding different Control plug-ins. Control plug-ins are the binding links between Viz

Artist and Viz Trio that allow properties to be exposed to the Viz Trio operator.

Scene elements can be of various complexities with one or more tab fields, different types of animations, and so on. The scene elements may also include placeholders which are basically non-graphical objects. These can in turn hold other scene elements, like for instance text objects.

A brief introduction to the Viz Artist GUI is provided initially. Only functions and features required to create scene elements will be addressed in this chapter.

See Also

Viz Artist User Interface

Page 226 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Creating Graphics

Adding Control Plug-ins

Creating Backgrounds

Creating Backplates

Creating Text Objects

Creating Image Objects

Creating Animations

• Viz Artist User’s Guide

10.2.1

Viz Artist User Interface

Open Viz Artist by clicking the Viz Artist button in the upper right corner of Viz Trio. The

Viz Artist user interface at startup displays the following:

Resources - Contains all the different objects stored on Viz Graphic Hub (Viz 3.x) or on the data root (Viz 2.x). The resources are available in the upper left corner of Viz

Artist under the Server tab.

Editors - Allows the user to modify the properties of an object. The various editors are displayed in the upper right corner.

Scene tree - Provides an overview of all the elements in a scene and their hierarchy. The scene tree is displayed in the lower left corner.

Preview - Displays a WYSIWYG representation of the graphics and what it will look like when on-air. The renderer is located in the lower right corner.

Interaction with the scene builder tools is generally based on drag and drop actions.

10.2.2

Creating Graphics

Create scene elements by using the various building blocks available in the Viz Artist database. The building blocks are basically placeholders which can hold different types of graphical elements and/or plug-ins. They are thus also known as containers.

Build the graphics by organizing the containers hierarchically in the scene tree pane and adjust the associated properties in the corresponding property editors. The tree

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 227

Page 228

Viz Trio User’s Guide structure constitutes a parent-child hierarchy in which all child containers will inherit properties of the parent container.

Selection of the building blocks to use depends on the type and complexity of the design. The following sub sections will provide a basic description on how to create scene elements in each of the various categories. Some steps are common for all categories, like for instance how to create a new scene and add a group container.

These procedures are addressed in the initial sections, while steps specific to each of the categories are described in separate sections.

This section contains information on the following topics:

To create a new scene element

To add group containers

To add geometries

To edit scale and position

To copy containers

To delete containers

To add materials

To add fonts

To add images

To add key

To define tab fields

To save scenes

To c reate a new scene element

1.

Start Viz Artist

2.

Select the Scene view.

For Viz Artist 3.x: Click the Server button and select Scene from the drop-list in the upper left corner of the Database window, og click the S tab.

For Viz Artist 2.x: Click the Scene button in the upper left corner of the

Database window.

3.

Locate and expand the

LIBRARY folder in the folder tree.

• The sub-folders that appear correspond to the various library categories available in the Designer and contains the different scene elements created by the designer.

• Note that scenes must be stored in the designated

LIBRARY sub-folders in order to be available as scene elements in the Designer’s Resources pane.

4.

Select the appropriate sub-folder (e.g.

BACKGROUNDS).

5.

Create a new scene.

For Viz Artist 3.x: Select Create... from the Scene database drop-menu, or press the CTRL+A keys.

For Viz Artist 2.x: Click the Add... button in the lower left corner of the Scene database pane.

6.

Enter a name for the scene in the appearing dialog box, and click OK.

• The new scene becomes available in the right part of the Server view.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

To add group containers

The Group function is a container which allows for elements to be grouped in the scene tree, and thereby create a parent-child hierarchy in which the child containers inherit the properties of its parent(s).

1.

Open the scene (see To create a new scene element ).

2.

Add a group container to the scene tree.

To add geometries

1.

Add a geometry object (e.g. Rectangle), and add it as a sub-container to the group container in the Scene Tree.

2.

Rename the rectangle’s sub-container to for example background in order to describe its function.

To edit scale and position

1.

Display the Transformation editor by selecting the Transformation icon on the container.

2.

Modify the objects’s size and position.

• The size and position of an object depends on the type of scene element you want to create. For example a lower third should cover the lower third of the screen, while an over the shoulder should cover parts of the screen over the should of the anchor/presenter.

3.

Specify the order of layered objects by using the Z field in the Position section.

• Some objects must be displayed behind the other elements in a scene, like for instance a background or a backplate, in order not to cover for elements which should be displayed in the front.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 229

Page 230

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• Keep in mind when creating scene elements that the object with the highest z-position will be displayed in the front, while the object with the lowest zposition will be displayed in the back (unless you are rotating objects on the yaxis which in case you might need to manually sort objects on the Z-axis using the Z-sort plug-in).

To copy containers

1.

Press the CTRL key and the left mouse button simultaneously and drag the container to its new location.

For Viz Artist 3.x: A node symbol will appear to the left of the copied container, indicating the position which the new container will be added when releasing the mouse button.

For Viz Artist 2.x: An arrow will appear to the very left of the scene tree, indicating the position in which the new container will be added when releasing the mouse button. Release the mouse button when at the appropriate position.

2.

To copy multiple containers, press the CTRL key and select the containers with the left mouse button. Drag the containers to the new location and release the mouse button.

To delete containers

1.

Select the container(s) to delete with the left mouse button and drag it/them onto the trash bin above the Renderer window, or

2.

Right-click the container, and select Delete Container <name> from the appearing context menu (Viz Artist 3.x only).

To add materials

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

1.

Select the material (M) tab under the server view (Material button in Viz Artist

2.x), and drag and drop a material object onto the container.

2.

Double-click the material to open the Material Editor to change the effects, or types of lights, of the material (e.g. Ambient, Diffuse, Specular and Emission).

See Also

• Viz Artist User’s Guide

To add fonts

1.

Select the font (F) tab under the server view (Font button in Viz Artist 2.x), and drag and drop a font onto the container.

2.

Open the transformation editor to change the size and position of the text.

To add images

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 231

Viz Trio User’s Guide

1.

Select the image (I) tab under the server view (Image button in Viz Artist 2.x), and drag and drop an image onto the container.

2.

Open the transformation editor to change the size and position of the text.

To add key

In order to enable Viz Engine to produce a key signal, key must be added to individual containers that hold objects that should draw key or the scene in general.

1.

Click the Built Ins button, and from the Container Plugins (CTRL+2) select the

Global folder.

• For Viz Artist 2.x: Click Function.

2.

Drag and drop the Key plugin onto the containers that should have key.

10.2.3

Adding Control Plug-ins

Page 232

In order to enable Viz Trio operators to edit the graphical elements, the containers must hold the necessary control plug-ins. These are container plug-ins that must be added for each of the graphical elements that should be editable. Which control plug-in to choose, depends on the type of property that needs to be exposed for editing.

In addition to the container specific plug-ins, the scene tree must have a plug-in called the Control Object plug-in. It is actually by means of the Control Object plug-in that Viz

Trio is able to identify a scene as a Viz Trio template. Note that only containers placed under the Control Object plug-in in a scene tree can be imported to Viz Trio.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

The control plug-ins are added manually to the containers using drag and drop. The interaction principles are the same for all control plug-ins except the Control Object plug-in that is added automatically if another control plug-in is added to the scene tree.

Control Object can also be added manually.

To add a control plug-in

1.

Click the Built Ins button, and select the Container Plugins (CTRL+2) option from the drop-menu or simply click the CP tab.

• For Viz Artist 2.x: Click Function, Container and select the Control folder.

2.

Select a control plug-in and add it to the appropriate container.

3.

Click on the control plug-in icon to display the associated editor.

To define tab fields

Viz Trio uses the control plug-in’s Field Identifier ID to identify the container as an editable element. Furthermore, the field’s ID defines a tab-field, and is used to specify the tab-order between the editable elements of a scene.

All control plug-ins located in the same container must have the same field ID. This will ensure that when choosing a tab-field, all associated property editors are enabled for selection.

To group properties located in different containers to the same tab-field, the property name must be added as an extension to the field ID, using the following format:

ID.propertyname, like for instance 2.scaling.

1.

Add a control plug-in (e.g. Control Text) to the scene tree.

2.

Open the control plug-in’s editor and set the Field Identifier.

• The field identifier should be a numeric value (range 1-n).

To save scenes

Options for saving and closing scenes are provided in the lower left corner of the Viz

Artist GUI.

1.

Click the Save button to save a new scene or to overwrite an open scene, or

2.

Select the Save As button to save it as a new scene.

10.2.4

Creating Backgrounds

This section is a quick tutorial on how to create a basic background with an image.

Note: Screenshots used are from Viz Artist 3. The user interface in Viz Artist 3 is similar to Viz Artist 2. Where needed additional explanation is given.

1.

Start by creating a new scene in the

BACKGROUNDS directory in the Viz Artist scene

tree (see how To create a new scene element ).

2.

Double-click on the new scene to open it, and add a group container to the scene

tree (see how To add group containers ).

3.

Add a new group as a sub-container to the first group, and name it background.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 233

Page 234

Viz Trio User’s Guide

4.

Add an object, in this case a rectangle, to the background container. The container should now have four icons; a show/hide, lock/unlock, transformation editor, and a rectangle icon (see how

To add geometries

).

5.

Adjust the rectangle’s size and position (see how To edit scale and position

).

• Select the Transformation button to open the Transformation editor.

• Change the position in the Position section, available in the upper left corner of the Transformation editor.

• In order to ensure that the background is displayed behind all other elements in a scene, adjust the Z position in the Position section. Remember that the Z position value of backgrounds must always be lower than the Z position value of the other scene element categories.

• Furthermore, if the background contains animations, verify that it will not at any time overlay the other objects. A low z-position value, like for instance

-500, will normally be sufficient, but increase if needed.

6.

Change the size of the rectangle to cover the whole area of the Renderer window in order to create a full-screen background. This is easiest done by pressing the

Screen button available in the Screen Size section in the lower right corner of the

Transformation editor. The rectangle will then be re-sized to cover the screen.

7.

Add an image to the scene tree (see

To add images

).

• Select an image and add it onto the background container using drag and drop.

8.

Add the key function to the background container (see how To add key

).

• In order for Viz Engine to produce a key signal, a key function must be added.

9.

Add a Control Image plug-in to the background group and the Control Object plug-

in will be added automatically (see Adding Control Plug-ins ).

• Adding the Control Image plug-in will allow the background object to be modified in Viz Trio in playout or design mode.

10. Define the tab-field. Select the Image icon on the container to display the Control

Image editor. Enter an ID in the Field Identifier field, for example 1.

• This creates a tab-field, which enables the user to edit any exposed properties.

If needed, the image position and scaling can be exposed for editing.

11. Add a description for the background object. Select the Control Object plug-in icon on the group container. Enter a description for the background object in the

Description field in the upper part of the editor (e.g. Background Still Image).

• The description entered in the Description field is the same as displayed when adding a scene element to the scene tree in Viz Trio’s Designer. Although optional, it is recommended to use the scene name as a description in order to provide a better overview.

12. Click the Save button to save the background object. Select the appropriate

BACKGROUND directory in the Scene database to see the new scene icon.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Viz Artist scene tree:

Viz Trio Designer scene tree:

For reference: After finishing this quick tutorial, the Viz Artist and Designer scene tree should look like the images above.

10.2.5

Creating Backplates

This section is a quick tutorial on how to create a basic backplate with two text

tab fields. For details on how to add animation to a backplate, see also Creating

Animations

.

Note: Screenshots used are from Viz Artist 3. The user interface in Viz Artist 3 is similar to Viz Artist 2. Where needed additional explanation is given.

1.

Start by creating a new scene in the

BACKPLATES directory in the Viz Artist scene

tree (see how To create a new scene element ).

2.

Double-click on the new scene to open it. Add a group container to the scene tree

(see how

To add group containers

).

• Rename the container, by double-clicking the label, to object.

3.

Add a new group as a sub-container to the first group, and name it backplate.

4.

Add an object, in this case a rectangle, to the backplate container. The container should now have four icons; a show/hide, lock/unlock, transformation editor, and a rectangle icon. For more information, see

To add geometries

.

5.

Adjust the rectangle’s size and position. For more information, see To edit scale and position

.

• Scale and position the rectangle to create a backplate. Use the Title and Safe

Areas as reference when positioning the rectangle. The Title Area (the blue box) is displayed by clicking on the TA button in the lower left corner of the

Renderer window, while the Safe Area (the green box) is shown when selecting the SA button.

6.

Display the Transformation editor by selecting the Transformation button, located on the backplate container.

• Scale the rectangle along the X and Y axes, and place it in the lower third area of the screen as illustrated by the images.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 235

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• The backplate should be able to be repositioned and scaled in the Designer and/or in playout mode. Hence, a 100% accuracy with regard to scale and position is not required in this case.

Note: If you have rounded/beveled corners they will be stretched if scaled.

7.

Set a Z-value slightly below zero (e.g. 10) for the backplate.

• For objects to be displayed in the front, always select zero or a higher value for the z-position. This will ensure that the scene elements are displayed in the correct layers and do not cover each other.

• Depending on the animations added later, this value could be less.

8.

Add a material to the scene tree (see

To add materials

).

• Select a material and add it onto the backplate container using drag and drop.

• To modify the color, display the Material editor by clicking the icon.

9.

Add the key function to the background container. For more information, see To add key .

• In order for Viz Engine to produce a key signal, a key function must be added.

10. Add a new group as a sub-container to the object container, and name it

placeholder. This will create a new empty group over the backplate container.

11. Add the Placeholder plug-in to the Placeholder container (see

Adding Control Plugins ).

• The Placeholder for the object allows users to add scene elements such as text and images to the backplate.

12. Optional: Add a font object as a sub-container to the placeholder container to provide a visual que while adjusting the position of the placeholder container.

Note: The font is a temporary visual que that must be removed once you have finished adjusting the placeholder container.

13. Open the placeholder container’s transformation editor, and scale and reposition the placeholder object to form a headline as illustrated in the example below.

Page 236

14. Adjust the Z-position in order to ensure that it will be displayed in front of the backplate. Generally a value slightly above zero will be sufficient.

15. When finished adjusting the placeholder object delete the font object as it is no longer needed (see how

To delete containers ).

16. Add the Control Container plug-in to the node labeled object (see Adding Control

Plug-ins ).

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• This enables basic positioning control for the entire backplate, including the placeholder object.

• The Control Container plug-in allows all child objects in the group to move simultaneously.

• Select the Control Container icon to open the associated editor. Expose the X,

Y, and Z position. The Field Identifier (1) is added automatically.

17. Add the Control Material plug-in to the node labeled backplate (see

Adding Control

Plug-ins ).

• Open the plug-in’s editor, and change the Field Identifier field to 1.material.

• This will group the material property to tab-field 1 and allow the user to modify it together with the other exposed properties of the tab-field.

18. Add the Control Container plug-in to the node labeled backplate (see Adding

Control Plug-ins ).

• Open the plug-in’s editor, and change the Field Identifier field to 1.scaling.

• This will group the material property to tab-field 1 and allow the user to scale the backplate.

• Expose the X and Y scaling.

• Open the Transformation editor, and enable the Single option in the Scaling section to allow X and Y axes to be scaled separately.

19. Select the Control Object icon in the object container to open the Control Object editor. Enter a description in the Description field, for example Basic backplate.

20. Click the Save button to save the backplate object.

21. Select the appropriate

BACKPLATES directory to see the newly created scene and the scene icon the Viz Trio operator will see in Viz Trio’s Designer.

10.2.6

Creating Text Objects

This section is a quick tutorial on how to create text objects.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 237

Page 238

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Note: Screen shots used are from Viz Artist 3. The user interface in Viz Artist 3 is similar to Viz Artist 2. Where needed additional explanation is given.

1.

Create a new scene in the

TEXT directory in the Viz Artist scene tree (see how

To create a new scene element ).

2.

Rename the group container to object (see how

To add group containers

).

3.

Add a font object to the scene tree as a sub-container of the object container, and rename the new container to text.

4.

Open the Text editor, and enter a common phrase (e.g. Abc).

5.

Add the key plugin to the object element (see how To add key

).

• In order for Viz Engine to produce a key signal, the key plugin must be added.

6.

Add a material to the text container (see how

To add materials

).

7.

Add the Control Text and the Control Material plug-in to the text container.

• This will will allow the Viz Trio operator to edit the text (see Adding Control

Plug-ins ).

Note: Control Object is automatically added to the scene tree’s root container.

8.

Select the icon to display the Control Text editor.

• The Field Identifier (1) has been added automatically, thereby creating a tabfield.

• Expose the kerning, font, and justification by clicking the corresponding buttons. Set other options if needed.

9.

Select the icon to display the Control Material editor.

• The Field Identifier (1) has been added automatically, thereby creating a tabfield.

10. Provide a description for the text object. This must be done in the Control Object editor.

• Select the Control Object icon in the object container to open the editor.

• Enter a description for the text object in the Description field, for example Plain

Text.

All scene elements available in Viz Trio Designer’s resource library are represented with icons reflecting the appearance of the saved scene. All graphical elements are reduced proportionally in size, and will therefore appear very small on the icon.

In order to create an icon with a good enough visualization of the scene, a dummy scaling group can be created at the root level of the scene tree. This will allow the graphical representation of the scene to be enlarged without changing the actual size of the actual scene objects.

11. Add a group to the root level of the scene tree.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• This will create an empty group container at the same level as the object container.

12. Select the object container and append it as a sub-container to the newly added

group container.

• As the object group with its Control Object is moved, it will not be used in the

Viz Trio Designer. This will allow you to create a good visual representation of the library element.

13. Open the transformation editor for the group container.

14. Position the text object to the lower left corner of the Renderer window.

15. Increase the scale of the text object until it fills the whole Renderer window.

16. Click the Save button to save the text object. Select the appropriate

TEXT

directory in the Scene database to see the new scene icon.

For reference: After finishing this quick tutorial, the Viz Trio Designer scene tree should look like the image below.

10.2.7

Creating Image Objects

This section is a quick tutorial on how to create image objects.

Note: Screen shots used are from Viz Artist 3. The user interface in Viz Artist 3 is similar to Viz Artist 2. Where needed additional explanation is given.

1.

Create a new scene in the

IMAGE directory (see how

To create a new scene element ).

2.

Add a group container to the Scene Tree (see how To add group containers ).

3.

Rename the group container to object.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 239

Page 240

Viz Trio User’s Guide

4.

Add an image to the scene tree as a sub-container of the object container. The container is automatically named the same name as the image. Rename the container to image.

5.

Add the key function to the object element (see how

To add key

).

• In order for Viz Engine to produce a key signal, a key function must be added.

6.

Add the Control Image plug-in to the image container, which will allow for image

changes (see Adding Control Plug-ins ).

Note: Control Object is automatically added to the scene tree’s root container.

7.

Add text or an image that will act as an icon for the container with the Control

Image editor.

• The Field Identifier (1) has been added automatically, thereby creating a tabfield.

In order to create a scene icon with a large and good enough visualization of the image object, a dummy scaling group can be added. This allows the graphical representation of the icon in the scene tree to be large enough without changing the actual size of the image object to be used in the template.

8.

Add a Group to the root level of the scene tree. This will create an empty group container at the same level as the object container.

• Select the object container and append it as a sub-container to the newly added group container (now top node).

• Select the Transformation icon in the group container to display the

Transformation editor.

• Increase the scale of the image object until it fills the whole Renderer window.

9.

Open the Control Image editor, and expose image position and scaling by clicking the corresponding buttons. Set other options if needed.

When having specified the parameters, various additional control plug-ins can be added to the image object. Selection of the control plug-ins depends on the effect to be created. Refer the Viz Artist User’s Guide for further details on the different control plug-ins.

10. Select the Control Object icon in the object container to open the editor. Enter a description for the image object in the Description field. For example New Image

Object.

11. Click the Save button to save the image object. Select the appropriate

IMAGE

directory in the Scene database to see the new scene icon.

For reference: After finishing this quick tutorial, the Viz Trio Designer scene tree should look like the image below.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

10.2.8

Creating Animations

This section is a quick tutorial on how to create a basic animation sliding in from the left. The process of creating an animation object follows the same principles as when adding an animation to graphic elements in ordinary Viz Artist scenes. Basically the only difference is that the animation is added to an empty container without any graphic elements.

Note: Screen shots used are from Viz Artist 3. The user interface in Viz Artist 3 is similar to Viz Artist 2. Where needed additional explanation is given.

1.

Create a new scene in the

ANIMATIONS directory (see how

To create a new scene element ).

2.

Add a group container to the scene tree (see how

To add group containers

).

3.

Add a group container to the scene tree as a sub-container of the group container, and rename the new container to object.

4.

Create a slide-in animation on the object container.

• To create a slide-in animation the object container’s position must be changed.

Initially the graphics can be off screen by moving it to the far left.

5.

Open the object container’s transformation editor, and specify the container’s initial X-position in the Position X field (e.g. -600).

6.

Verify that the timeline field in the timeline editor, seen above the Scene Editor, is set to 0 (fields).

7.

Click the Set Key button (aka Update in Viz Artist 2).

• This will create a keyframe reflecting the scene as is. The number of fields specified in the timeline field is automatically updated to 50, which is the default interval.

8.

In the Transformation editor, reset the Position X to 0.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 241

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Tip: Click the R (reset) button to the right of the Position X field.

9.

Click the Set Key button again to create a new keyframe.

• This creates a simple in-animation.

• The values at these keyframes are called keys. Viz Artist calculates the interpolated values between each key to produce the completed animation.

10. Create an out-animation that slides the object out the same way it came in (e.g.

Position X set to -600).

11. Click the Set Key button again to create a new keyframe.

• Viz Artist calculates the interpolated values between the second and third keyframes to produce the completed out-animation.

Creating the animation adds an animation icon to the object container. Clicking the icon displays the Stage editor, which allows for further tuning of the animation.

In order to ensure that the animation stays on screen for as long as required, a stop point at the end of the in-animation can be added, which in this case would be at field 50 in the timeline. The stop point will prevent the out-animation from playing before a Continue command is issued.

12. Open the Stage editor by selecting the animation icon (wheel) on the object container.

• The animation channel is represented by a gray (Viz Artist 3) or green (Viz

Artist 2) line in the right part of the Stage editor.

• The keyframes are indicated by small rectangles.

13. Move the red Timeline Marker, represented as a vertical red line, to the second keyframe (the in point).

14. Select the Default director as illustrated in the example above.

15. Click the Add a Stop/Tag button (aka Add Stop button in Viz Artist 2.x).

• It is now possible to see the stop point just added to the Default director.

Page 242

16. Select the Stop point to open the editor to see, and if needed, adjust the parameters for the stop point.

• Verify that the stop point has the same time settings as the second keyframe.

17. Add Control Object plug-in to the object container (see

Adding Control Plug-ins ).

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Note: Given that the animation object is created without the need for graphic elements, there is no need to expose properties for editing; however,

Control Object is needed as it provides a description for the animation object.

18. Open the Control Object editor, and enter an appropriate description to the

Description field.

19. Add a Group container to the scene tree as a sub-container of the object container, and rename the new container to placeholder.

20. Add the Placeholder plug-in to the Placeholder container (see

Adding Control Plugins ).

• The Placeholder for the object allows users to add scene elements such as backplates, text, and images to the animation.

Note: The animation object contains no graphical elements, hence, saving the scene will create a blank scene icon when viewed in Viz Trio.

21. Create a dummy container with graphics illustrating the animation and apply this as a scene icon.

• This will easily distinguish one animation scene from another in Viz Trio.

Tip: In order to provide a graphical illusion of the animation sliding in from the left, a built-in arrow object can be used.

22. Add a geometry, in this case an arrow, to the scene tree (see To add geometries

).

23. Level the Arrow container with the group container to ensure that the arrow graphics are not displayed on screen during Playout.

24. Open the Arrow editor to set the style and size of the geometry.

25. Open the Arrow container’s transformation editor to scale and reposition the arrow to illustrate it coming in from the left.

• Add material, images and text if needed.

26. Click the Save button to save the animation object. Select the appropriate

ANIMATIONS directory in the Scene database to see the new scene icon.

For reference: After finishing this quick tutorial, the Viz Trio Designer scene tree should look alike the image below.

Note: SLIDE IN FROM LEFT refers to the control object plugin’s description field, and placeholder to the placeholder plugin’s description field.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 243

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 244 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

11 Creating Standalone Scenes

This section will show you how to create your basic lower third as a standalone scene.

This scene can be imported to Viz Trio in order to create a template for creating pages that are used for playout.

For ease of use, the scene example has been split up in several procedures. In order for the example to work, it is recommended to follow each procedure in the order of appearance.

This section contains information on the following topics:

To create a scene

To add a background

To add text

To create an in animation

To create an out animation

To add stop tags

To add key functions to the container

To add expose properties

To edit multiple elements with a single value

To create a scene

1.

Start Viz Artist 2.x or 3.x, and create a blank scene.

• For Viz Artist 3.x: Start Viz Artist and start creating the new scene.

• For Viz Artist 2.x: Open the directory in the Viz Artist scene tree where the lower third scene will be saved. Create a new blank scene by pressing the Add button, and open the scene.

2.

Add a group container to the tree.

• For Viz Artist 3.x: Click or drag the Group icon labeled G (see image above).

• For Viz Artist 2.x: Click the Function button, and click or drag the Group icon.

3.

Rename the group to for example lowerthird.

• To change the container’s name, double click on the name section of the container.

4.

Add another group container as a sub-container to the lowerthird container.

• To add a sub-container drag the group object to the right of the existing container.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 245

Page 246

Viz Trio User’s Guide

5.

Name the second group object.

To add a background

1.

Add a rectangle from the Built Ins object pool and drop it as a sub-container of the

object container, and rename it to Background.

• For Viz Artist 3.x: Click the Built Ins button, and select Primitives from the droplist. The object can be found in the Default folder.

• For Viz Artist 2.x: Open the Object pool and click on the button labeled Built in.

2.

Open the rectangle’s editor and the background container’s transformation editor to scale and then position the object so that it covers the "lower third" of the screen.

• Rectangle editor: Width 800 and Height 125.

• Transformation editor: Position Y -160.

3.

Since this element is a background element it should be a little bit behind the other objects on the Z-axis.

• Transformation editor: Position Z -100.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

4.

Add a material (see To add materials

) object to give the rectangle color.

• For Viz Artist 3.x: Click the Server button and select Materials on its drop-down menu (CTRL+3 or the M tab).

• For Viz Artist 2.x: Click the Material button to open the material database, and select a color.

5.

Drag the desired material from the material pool and drop it onto the Background container.

To add text

To further improve the basic lower third a headline element and two text lines, lead by a bullet symbol, can be added.

1.

Add a group as a sub-container to the object container, and name the group

front_objects.

2.

Add a font as a sub-container of the front_objects group container, and name it

headline.

• Open the text editor by clicking the text symbol of that container.

• In the text editor enter the word Headline in the text input field and set the

Horizontal orientation to Left. This positions the text on the right side of the Y axis to allow the text to be written from left to right.

3.

Add a material to the font container.

4.

Open the transformation editor to scale and position the font so that the headline is placed in the upper left corner of the lower third background.

5.

Add a group container as a sub-container of the front_objects group, and name it

bullet_1.

6.

As sub-containers of bullet_1, add a font and any image or object that can function as a bullet symbol.

• Name the text container bullet_text and the image bullet_symbol.

7.

In bullet_text’s text editor enter the text "Bullet 1 text here".

• Set the horizontal orientation to left as for the headline container.

• Add a material to the bullet_text container.

• Scale and position the two containers reciprocally, and then position the

bullet_1 container under the headline.

8.

Make a copy of the bullet_1 container by dragging the container while holding down the CTRL key. Position it as a sub-container of the front_objects container.

• Rename the copy to bullet_2.

• Adjust the Y-position of bullet_2.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 247

To create an in animation

Viz Trio User’s Guide

To make the whole lower third rotate in from the left side of the screen, the object container must be animated. To make the rotation look right, the X-centre of the container must be set to the left.

1.

Open the transformation editor for the object container and click the L button to the right of the Axis Center X property.

2.

Change the Rotation value for the Y-axis so the container moves out to the left side and is hidden.

3.

Press the Set Key (Viz Artist 3.x) or Update (Viz Artist 2.x) button.

4.

Set the Rotation value for the Y-axis back to zero by pressing the R (reset) button.

Perform the previous step to set a new key. An animation object should now be visible on the object container. Play the animation in the render window.

To create an out animation

Page 248

To create an out animation, a simple fade out animation of the whole object can be created.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

1.

Add an Alpha function to the object container.

• For Viz Artist 3.x: Click the Built Ins button, and select Function Container from the drop-list. The Alpha function can be found in the Global folder.

• For Viz Artist 2.x: Click the Function button.

2.

Open the alpha editor.

• Set the alpha value to 100% and update the animation by setting a new key.

• Set the alpha value to 0.0% and update the set key again.

• This has created an alpha animation in addition to the rotation animation.0

3.

Click the Stage button and look at the animation channels:

4.

It is possible to move the keyframes to achieve a different timing. Move keyframes either by dragging them with the mouse or by clicking on them and alter the time settings in the keyframe editor

To add stop tags

When playing out the scene, the objects should move in from the left and then fade out again. In order to stop the animation after the rotation, a stop point must be added before the animation can continue and fade out the scene.

1.

Move the timeline (the thin red vertical line) to the second keyframe of the rotation channel (an exact spot is not needed as it is easy to adjust afterwards).

2.

Add a Stop keyframe to the Default director.

• For Viz Artist 3.x: Click the Add a Stop/Tag button above the stage editor.

• For Viz Artist 2.x: Click the Default director label to open the Default director editor. Click the Add Stop button.

3.

Move the stop-point with the mouse or move it by using its editor that opens when it is selected. Check that it has the same time settings as the second keyframe on the rotation channel.

4.

Play out the animation to verify that it stops when the rotation has finished. Click the Continue button to proceed with the alpha fade.

To add key functions to the container

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 249

Page 250

Viz Trio User’s Guide

1.

Add a key function to the background container, and click the key icon to open the key editor.

• For Viz Artist 3.x: Click the Built Ins button, and select Function Container from the drop-list. The Alpha function can be found in the Global folder.

• For Viz Artist 2.x: Click the Function button.

2.

The key for the background must have the Alpha as key only setting enabled (On).

This is to avoid a "dirty key" if the background has some level of transparency. Set the Render mode to Blend.

3.

Add a key function to the front_objects container. On this key signal the Alpha

as key only setting must be disabled (Off), and the Render mode must be set to

Add. This is to avoid the foreground objects to cut a hole in the key signal of the background object.

To add expose properties

To make the scene ready for import into Viz Trio, Control plug-ins must be added. The plug-ins enables the designer to expose scene properties to the Viz Trio operator.

1.

Add the Control Object plug-in to the object container.

• For Viz Artist 3.x: Click the Built Ins button, and select Function Container from the drop-list. The Control Object plug-in can be found in the Control folder.

• For Viz Artist 2.x: Click the Function button, and in the Control folder select the

Control Object plug-in.

2.

Click on the Control Object icon on the object container to open its editor.

• Enter a description for the Viz Trio template (e.g. Lower Third).

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

3.

Add the Control Text plug-in to the Headline and both bullet_text containers.

4.

Click on the Control Text icon on the containers to open its editor.

• Set the Field identifier and Description. The Field identifier must be a numeric value and the value will be used to give the Viz Trio page a tab order.

• In this scene the Headline container will typically get identifier 1, and the two bullet_text containers will get identifier 2 and 3. There are other parameters that can be set.

It is possible to expose more properties to the Viz Trio operator. By exposing the position, rotation, and scaling properties the operator can hide or show an object and add material.

5.

Add the Control Container plug-in to the container to be exposed (e.g.headline).

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 251

Page 252

6.

Click the Container plug-in icon to open is editor.

Viz Trio User’s Guide

7.

Enter a field identifier. If there is another control plug-in on that container, like a

Control Text or Image, use the same Field identifier.

• X/Y/Z properties for a keyframe in an animation must be specified by a stop keyframe name.

To edit multiple elements with a single value

• Use the same field identifier for multiple control plug-ins to treat two or more fields as a single editing element that will receive the same value.

This can for example be used with a bar that scales and a text label that shows its value. The scale value and the text can then be set in a single operation, ensuring that there is no mismatch between the bar size and the written text value.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

12 Creating Transition Effects

To create transition effects you can either use the built-in transition effect feature for stills and videos or you can create custom transition effects by designing scenes in Viz

Artist.

This chapter contains information on the following topics:

Using the built-in Transition Effect features

Creating Transition Effect Scenes

12.1

Using the built-in Transition Effect features

The built-in transition effects gives easy access to basic effects like cut and fade.

Configure Viz Trio to use the built-in transition effects

To use the built-in transition effects for videos and stills the video outputs in the

Configuration settings must enable transitions by selecting the "Use Transitions" checkbox. This menu option can be selected in File > Configuration > Output >

Add Video. For details see the Working With the Profile Configuration section.

To make the setup work for graphic elements the Viz output in the Configuration settings must set the mode from "Standard" to "Scene Transitions". This menu option can be set in File > Configuration > Output > Add Viz... “Mode”-option

To make transitions between stills and videos work the profile needs to define a channel for both video and graphic elements (Viz and Video output). Or it has to make sure that stills and video elements get played out on the same Viz Engine, otherwise transitions between those elements is not possible.

Note: In the case where one dual channel machine is used for both program and external preview it might happen that the machine has not enough capacity to show transitions on both channels. For this case Trio can use a simpler preview scene for stills which doesn't support transitions. To use this scene the external preview channel needs to specify the override concept "PREVIEW".

Using the built-in transition effects in Viz Trio

To view the effects column, right-click on the playlist column and in the context menu select Effect to make the column visible.

Transition effects can be chosen individually per element or as default for the playlist.

The default for a playlist can be chosen when opening the default effect dialog by pressing on the "Fx.." button. Default values are shown in the effect column with bracket values "[...]". Individual effects are shown without brackets.

The effect column in a playlist shows different effect sets depending on the element type:

• still images and video elements (currently Cut and Fade).

• graphic elements (the scene transition effects).

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 253

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Starting with Trio version 3, there are two new macro commands to set the default effects for the show:

show:set_default_scene_effect and

show:set_default_video_effect

For reference see Macro Commands and Events

section VizBoldshow .

12.2

Creating Transition Effect Scenes

The following section describes how to design custom transition effects for Viz Trio. The scene transition mechanism uses a hardware feature called Dynamic Scene.

In Viz Artist you have To create dynamic textures

using the Dyncamic Scene plugin found under the Media Assets tab. You may also find these textures as part of an already existing transition effect scenes in the dynamic folder (at root level).

The textures must be named layer1 and layer2. These two are not ordinary images as they have the possibility to load into them an actual scene.

layer1 - Represents the first scene.

layer2 - Represents the scene to transit to.

It is possible to make any kind of animation, but there are a few design conventions to follow.

The scene should start with a full screen view of the dynamic texture layer1, and end with a full screen display of the dynamic texture layer2. Use the screen size section in the transformation editor to set the size of the texture container to fit the screen exactly.

A transition scene is a scene that is created to move from one scene to the next in a dynamic way (not by cut).

Note: All scenes must be placed in a transitions folder in the scene database to make it visible in the control application.

To create dynamic textures

1.

Start Viz Artist

2.

Add the Dynamic Scene plugin to your Scene Tree.

3.

Open the Dynamic Scene plugin’s Dynamic tab and configure the properties (e.g.

setting width and height).

Page 254 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

4.

Open the DYNAMIC_SCENE container’s tranformation editor and set Screen Size to Screen.

5.

Open the Server Area

6.

Create a folder at the root level and name it dynamic

7.

Select the Image (I) tab

8.

Drag the Current Scene placeholder icon into the Server Area and save two textures as

layer1 and layer2.

Note: Depending on the Viz version you use, the icons may be different.

To create a transition scene

1.

Add or create a new scene in the transition scene folder.

2.

Add a group to the scene tree, and rename the container to Fade.

3.

Add the dynamic texture Layer 1 and Layer 2 as sub-containers to the Fade group container.

Note: There might not be images in the preview window, but only the bounding box.

4.

Open the Fade group container’s transformation editor, and resize the container to fit the entire screen by clicking the Screen button.

The scaling of the main group (Fade) to the screen size will ensure that the dynamic textures (layer 1 and layer2) brought under it will be the correct full frame size.

5.

Click the Built Ins button, select Container Plugins (CP) from the drop-list and then the Global folder.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 255

Viz Trio User’s Guide

6.

Add the Alpha plug-in to the Layer 1 and Layer 2 containers.

7.

Create a fade out animation for the Layer 1 container.

• Click the Alpha plug-in on the container, and set the Alpha to 100%.

• Click the Set key frame button above the Scene Editor.

• Set the Alpha value to 0% and click the Set key frame button again.

8.

Create a fade in animation for the Layer 2 container.

• Repeat the steps for Layer 1 in reverse order.

9.

Open the Server Area

10. Create a folder at the root level and name it transitions

11. Save the scene to the transitions folder.

Tip: Place the timeline somewhere in the middle before the scene is saved as it usually gives the best representation of the transition effect.

Tip: Transition scenes are commonly stored in a transitions scene folder at the root of the database directory structure.

See Also

• Viz Artist User’s Guide

Page 256 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

13 Command Line Parameters

Use the command line parameters below to customize the Viz Trio startup.

To add a command line parameter

• Right-click the program shortcut, and edit the program target path.

Example: "C:\Program Files (x86)\vizrt\Viz Trio\trio.exe" -mse localhost -control force_gpu_count 2

Command line parameters

Value Syntax Parameter

-control

-folder showpath

-force_gpu_count integer

integer local_program_channel_port

-logfile-path

-loglevel

-mse

-nle-mode

-no-nle-mode

-scriptloglevel

-socket

-t directory integer hostname integer quoted string

Description

Allows you to configure Viz Trio.

Causes the client to start in the specified show.

Allows the user to force/override the available (detected by Viz) number of

GPUs used for preview and program channel.

Overrides the configured port number set for the local program channel. This is useful if another port, than the default

6800, needs to be set.

Folder in which log files are stored.

Controls how much is logged to the log file.

Media Sequencer hostname.

Start Viz Trio in "NLE mode".

Start an NLE-compiled Viz Trio in normal

(non-NLE) mode.

Controls how much is logged when executing scripts.

Use socket (TreeTalk) for Media

Sequencer communication.

Redefine the main window title of Trio. %v will be replaced by the version string. %h will be replaced by the MSE-host. %s will be replaced by the current show path.

Default, if -t not specified: "Viz Trio %v -

MSE: %h - Show: %s"

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 257

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Parameter

-usersetting

-viz2

-viz-console-delay

-vizdb

-vizparams

-vizpreview

-viz-startup-timeout

Value Syntax

settingsname

<time in seconds> host:db:user:pw quoted string hostname: port<:protocol> integer

Description

Use something other than the hostname as an identifier for user settings.

Start Viz Engine 2 instead of Viz Engine

3for local preview.

Starts Viz Trio independetly of the Viz

Engine process, enabling use of Viz Trio before Viz Engine is running. Note that the Viz Engine console is displayed in this mode (during startup) which can be used to debug Viz Engine start-up problems.

Configure the Viz Engine 3 database login for the local preview engine.

Extra parameters to pass on when starting the local viz engine.

Connect to an external Viz Engine for preview. Viz Engine 2 must have a Viz

Multiplexer.

Specifies the time-out to use during startup of Viz Trio when communicating with

Viz Engine. The default time-out value is set to 30 seconds. Time-outs during start-up will often leave Viz Trio unusable.

After Viz Trio has successfully started up, the time-out setting in the

Local Preview

configuration is used.

Page 258 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

14 Logging

Log files are crucial in order for Vizrt personnel to troubleshoot any issues related to our products. When investigating Viz Trio related issues, the Viz Trio log files, in addition to log files on the Media Sequencer and Viz Engine, are highly relevant.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Viz Trio Log Levels

Viz Trio Log Files

Viz Trio Error Messages

Viz Engine Log Files

Media Sequencer Files

Media Sequencer Logging

Command Line Parameters

14.1

Viz Trio Log Levels

From the General section of the Configuration it is possible to specify various Viz Trio

log levels. The log levels can be set to 0, 1, 2, 5, or 9.

Loglevel 0: Only error messages will be logged.

Loglevel 1: Warning messages will be added.

Loglevel 2: Timer messages will be added. These show the amount of time different operations take in the program.

Loglevel 5: Status messages will be added. These show ordinary program events such as "page loaded", "page taken", and so on.

Loglevel 9: All commands sent to the Viz Engine rendering process will be added.

For more information, see To change the Viz Trio log level

.

Tip: Messages on log level 0 and 1 (error and warning messages) can also be viewed in the

Error Messages Window

.

14.2

Viz Trio Log Files

Various Viz Trio Log Levels

can be specified in order to define the level of logging details. Log level 0 will for example provide information only about crucial errors, while log level 9 will provide logging information about a wide range of events.

Caution: In many cases it may be beneficial to set a low Media Sequencer

Logging level, preferably to 0, because a high level of logging might affect the

performance when running in a production environment.

To change the Viz Trio log level

1.

Click the menu option File > Configuration to open the Trio Configuration.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 259

Viz Trio User’s Guide

14.3

2.

Select General

from the

User Interface

section.

3.

In the Log level box, type a log level according to the available Viz Trio Log

Levels .

To change the Viz Trio log file path

1.

Click the Config button in Viz Trio’s main window to open the Trio Configuration.

2.

Select Paths

from the User Interface section.

3.

In the Logfile path box, enter the path to where the log files should be located from now on.

Viz Trio Error Messages

In addition to being available in the log files, messages on log level 0 and 1 (error and warning messages) can be viewed in the

Error Messages Window

.

Error Messages Window

This section contains information on the following topics:

To view Viz Trio error messages

To view Viz Trio error messages and warnings

To save the content displayed in the Error Messages Window

To view Viz Trio error messages

• Click the Errors button in the lower right corner of the Viz Trio main window.

The

Error Messages Window

then opens.

To view Viz Trio error messages and warnings

1.

Click the Errors button in the lower right corner of the Viz Trio main window.

2.

In the

Error Messages Window

that opens, select the Show Warnings check box.

To save the content displayed in the Error Messages Window

1.

Click the Errors button in the lower right corner of the Viz Trio main window.

2.

In the

Error Messages Window

that opens, click Save to file.

3.

In the Save As dialog that opens, define the path and enter a descriptive name for the .txt file.

14.4

Viz Engine Log Files

In addition to Viz Trio’s log files created on the client side, it is recommended to read, and if needed send, log files to Vizrt support that were created on the Media Sequencer and Viz Engine.

Page 260 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Viz Engine log files are located in the program folder:

• Viz Engine 2: C:\Program Files\vizrt\viz

• Viz Engine 3:

• Windows 7:

C:\Program Files (x86)\Vizrt\Viz3

Example: VizRender_1159345015.log

14.5

14.6

Media Sequencer Files

In addition to Viz Trio’s log files created on the client side, it is recommended to read, and if needed send, log files to Vizrt support that were created on the Media Sequencer and Viz Engine.

Media Sequencer config files

The

default.xml files are stored here:

• Win Vista and 7/8:

C:\ProgramData\Vizrt\Media Sequencer Engine

Media Sequencer Logging

Viz Trio supports using Intelligent Interface (IIF), and through that interface the log level for Intelligent Interface specific messages on the Media Sequencer can be set. For more information on how to set log levels for the Media Sequencer, see the Media Sequencer documentation.

All logging of output can be assigned a log level. Messages are only written to the log if the current log level is greater than the log level of the message. The log levels are defined as integers in the range 0-100. At a given log level, all the information specified for lower log levels are also logged.

The log level can be changed while the Media Sequencer is running, and the logging output will immediately reflect the new log level.

Caution: Remember to set a low log level, preferably to zero, because a high level of logging might affect the performance when running in a production environment.

See the table for a complete list of predefined log levels.

Log levels

Name

Never

Bug

Failure

Level What will be logged

0 Nothing

5

10

Bugs detected in the software.

A permanent error, for example part of the software was disabled and no further automatic retries will be attempted.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 261

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Name

Lost link

Error

Warning

Notice

Connection

Operation

Input

Output

State

Analysis

Trace

All

70

80

90

Level What will be logged

15 A network connection or other link or precious resource was unexpectedly lost. The software might attempt to reestablish the link automatically.

20 Something is incorrect. An internal or external operation could not be completed successfully.

30

35

A cause for concern has been detected.

An infrequent but expected event occurred.

40

50

60

A network connection or connection to another precious resource was intentionally opened or closed.

High level operations that are executed as requested or planned.

Data that is received into the system from external connections.

Data sent to from the system through external connections.

A change in the significant state of the system.

Derived information and meta information generated during execution, such as the running times of the executed actions.

95

100

The various stages the internal operations of the system goes through during execution.

All possible logging information, including operation scheduling and loop iteration, and running state statistics.

Page 262 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

15 Preview Server

The Preview Server is a Windows service that manages a pool of Viz Engines. Clients, such as Viz Multichannel, Viz Pilot and Viz Trio, can send requests to the Preview

Server, asking for available Viz Engines, which may provide frames for thumbnails and snapshots in an ongoing preview process.

As the name implies, the Preview Server provides Viz Engine connections to the clients during the creative preview process. Later on, when the output is finalized and actually being played out, the Viz Engines provided by the Preview Server is replaced by the Viz

Engine specified directly in the clients.

The Preview Server provides load balancing, and it can be used to create a redundant renderer pool.

For more details, see the Preview Server Administrator’s Guide.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 263

Viz Trio User’s Guide

Page 264 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

16 Appendix

This section contains supplementary information related to Viz Trio:

Cherry Keyboard

Enabling Windows Crash dumps

Previous Trio Release highlights

16.1

Cherry Keyboard

Early versions of Viz Trio was shipped with an now old version of the Cherry Keyboard. If you are still using this keyboard you should be able to use it with current versions of Viz

Trio.

The keyboard contains two rows with extra function keys which have been assigned to different Viz Trio actions. The keyboard has its own configuration software. A Viz Trio configuration file must be loaded to create the correct keyboard map. In the Viz Trio client a keyboard mapping file must be imported to assign the correct actions to the keys. This is pre-installed on all Viz Trio clients, so normally there is no need to change these settings.

This section contains information on the following topics:

Editing Keys (green)

Navigation Keys (white)

Program Channel Keys (red)

Preview Channel Keys (blue)

Program and Preview Channel Keys (red and blue)

Viz Trio Keyboard

Keyboard Shortcuts and Macros

16.1.1

Editing Keys (green)

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 265

Viz Trio User’s Guide

The green keys all perform editing operations. The current tab-field must have the property of the key exposed for editing. If not, the key will have no effect and an error message will be written to the log file when the key is pressed.

POS - Displays the position editor.

ROTATE - Displays the rotation editor.

TEXT - Displays the text editor.

KERN - Displays the character kerning editor.

SCALE - Displays the scaling editor

OBJECT - Displays the object pool where 2D and 3D objects can be browsed for.

HIDE/UNHIDE - Hides/shows the tab-field.

COLOR - Shows the pool of colors.

ROLL/CRAVL - Opens the scroller editor

IMAGE - Opens the image pool.

16.1.2

Navigation Keys (white)

The white keys shift between different views and editors in the program.

PRE VIEW - If extra page views have been defined, this key shifts the view to the

one above the currently active view, see Add Page List View .

NEXT VIEW - If extra page views have been defined, this key shifts the view to the one below the currently active view.

ACTIVE VIEW - When the program has the active focus on some part outside the current page view, hitting this key will bring back the page view in an active state and it is possible to navigate between the pages with the arrow keys.

BROWSE DB - When on an image tab-field, hitting this key will open the

Search

Media

frame to allow for media searches

BROWSE VIZ - When on an image tab-field, hitting this key will open Viz Engine‘s image database.

CHG DIR - Displays the change directory or show window.

16.1.3

Program Channel Keys (red)

Page 266

The red function keys all affect actions on the program channel.

CLR PGM - Clears all loaded content on the program channel.

INIT - Initializes the current show on both the program and preview channel.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

UPDATE - When a change has be done to a page that is already On-air, hitting update will merge in the changes without running any animations. This is typically used for fixing typing errors. If a page is changed and Take is used instead of

Update, all animation directors in the scene will be executed and this normally creates an unwanted effect.

TAKE+ READ NEXT - Takes the page currently read, and reads the next one in the list.

SWAP - The swap key takes to air what is currently read and visible in preview, and it takes of what is currently On-Air and reads that page again.

16.1.4

Preview Channel Keys (blue)

The blue keys all affect actions on the preview channel.

CLR PVW - Clears the preview channel

SAVE - Saves the page currently shown on the preview channel.

SAVE AS - Saves the page currently shown in preview to the page number typed in.

16.1.5

Program and Preview Channel Keys (red and blue)

The blue keys affect actions on the preview channel, and the red on the program channel.

CONTINUE - When a scene based page halts at a stop point, hitting the Continue key will make the animation continue.

TAKE OUT - If transition logic is used, the Take Out key will take out any page loaded in the layer that is currently read. If transition logic is not used, the Take

Out key will perform a "clear" which will be a "hard cut". To obtain a smooth out animation, the scene must be designed with a stop point and an "out animation", and the Continue key must be used to take out the page.

READ PREV - Reads the previous page in the page list.

READ - Reads the page currently highlighted by the cursor.

TAKE - Takes the page that is currently read.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 267

Viz Trio User’s Guide

16.2

Enabling Windows Crash dumps

Log files can be a valuable tool to understand and analyze unexpected program behavior. In addition to the various log files Vizrt programs can create it is recommended to allow Microsoft Windows to generate User-mode crash dumps. This can make debugging easier, particular if there are hardware or general Windows issues affecting program behavior.

Enabling User-mode Dumps requires Windows 7 or higher. To enable, configure the following registry setting:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\Windows

Error Reporting\LocalDumps

For more information, see the Microsoft web at Collecting User-Mode Dumps

16.3

Previous Trio Release highlights

Viz Trio 2.12.1

New features:

• Support for meta data in media search and Viz One keyword search

• Added the new macro commands

gui:get_callup_code and

playlist:select_next_by_description

For further details, see the Viz Trio 2.12.1 release notes.

Viz Trio 2.12

Main new features:

• Linking of tab-fields to ATOM feeds

• Timeline editing of video elements

• Improved Viz One integration

• Improvements in the render video clip window

• New script events

Other features:

• New editor for combo templates

• Added macro command to launch the feed streamer moderation tool

• Introduced saving of templates with field linking, default values and settings

• Improved access to show and template scripts

• Arm & fire macro commands to play out different elements on different channels simultaneously

• The media search can incrementally display more hits

• New macro commands for Viz Gateway configuration

• Playlists can apply filters on groups as well

Page 268 Copyright © 2015 Vizrt

Viz Trio User’s Guide

• Configuration for as-run logging of the Media Sequencer

• The import scene window remembers the last used folder

• New macro command to clean up all channels of a profile

• Added license information for included 3rd party components

• Added last update time for MOS playlists

• Added command to load a single page on the program and preview channel:

show:load_on_renderers

For further details, see the Viz Trio 2.12 release notes.

Copyright © 2015 Vizrt Page 269

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement